Owner's Manual Web Edition

VOLVO C70

Owner's manual Web Edition

Information Provided by: Provided Information Information Provided by:Provided Information Welcome to the world-wide family of Volvo owners. We trust that you vehicle if you may be affected by alcohol, medication or any impair- will enjoy many years of safe driving in your Volvo, an automobile ment that could hinder your ability to drive. designed with your safety and comfort in mind. We encourage you Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable federal safety and to familiarize yourself with the equipment descriptions and operating emission standards. If you have any questions regarding your vehicle, instructions in this manual. please contact your Volvo retailer or see the section "Contacting We also urge you and your passengers to wear seat belts at all times Volvo" in this manual's "Introduction" chapter for information on get- in this (or any other) vehicle. And, of course, please do not operate a ting in touch with Volvo in the United States and Canada.

Information Provided by:Provided Information Contents

00 Introduction 01 Safety 02 Instruments and controls Important information...... 10 Occupant safety...... 18 Instrument overview...... 52 Environment...... 14 Seat belts...... 20 Instrument panel...... 54 Important warnings...... 15 Supplemental Restraint System...... 24 Indicator and warning symbols...... 56 Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS)...... 29 Symbols – instrument panel...... 58 Side impact protection airbags...... 32 Information display...... 61 Door Mounted Inflatable Curtain system 12-volt sockets...... 63 (DMIC) ...... 34 Lighting panel...... 64 Whiplash Protection System...... 35 Left-side steering wheel lever...... 68 Roll-over Protection system (ROPS) ...... 37 Trip computer...... 70 Crash mode...... 38 Cruise control*...... 72 Child safety...... 39 Right-side steering wheel lever...... 74 Child restraint systems...... 41 Steering wheel adjustment, Hazard warn- Infant seats...... 43 ing flashers...... 76 Convertible seats...... 45 Power windows...... 77 00 Booster01 cushions...... 47 Mirrors...... 02 78 ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors...... 48 Personal settings...... 81 HomeLink® Wireless Control System*...... 83

Information Provided by:Provided Information

4 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. Contents

03 Climate 04 Interior 05 Locks and alarm General information...... 88 Front seats...... 98 Remote key and key blade...... 122 Air vents...... 90 Power retractable hard top ...... 106 Valet locking ...... 126 Electronic Climate Control (ECC)...... 91 Interior lighting...... 111 Keyless drive*...... 128 Air distribution...... 95 Storage compartments...... 113 Locking and unlocking...... 132 03 Trunk04 ...... 117 Alarm...... 05 135

Information Provided by:Provided Information

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 5 Contents

06 Starting and driving 07 Wheels and tires 08 Car care General information...... 140 General information...... 176 Washing and cleaning the car...... 206 Fuel requirements...... 143 Tire inflation...... 179 Paint touch up...... 210 Ignition switch...... 146 Inflation pressure ...... 181 Starting the vehicle...... 147 Tire designations...... 182 Starting the vehicle with keyless drive*... 149 Glossary of tire terminology...... 184 Automatic transmission...... 151 Vehicle loading...... 185 Shiftlock override...... 153 Uniform tire quality gradings...... 187 Brake system...... 154 Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires.. 188 Parking brake...... 157 Tire Sealing System* ...... 189 Stability system...... 158 Temporary spare...... 195 Towing...... 160 Spare tire and jack ...... 196 Jump starting...... 163 Wheel nuts...... 198 Towing a trailer...... 164 Changing a wheel...... 199 Detachable06 trailer hitch...... 166 Tire Pressure07 Monitoring System (TPMS) 201 08 Transporting loads...... 167 Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)*... 168 Rear park assist*...... 172

Information Provided by:Provided Information

6 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. Contents

09 Maintenance and servicing 10 Audio 11 Specifications Volvo maintenance...... 214 Introduction ...... 244 Label information...... 270 Maintaining your car...... 215 Audio functions...... 245 Dimensions and weights...... 272 Hood...... 217 Radio functions...... 251 Fuel, oils, and fluids...... 275 Engine compartment...... 218 CD player...... 259 Engine oil...... 277 Engine oil...... 219 Audio menu...... 262 Engine specifications...... 278 Fluids...... 221 Bluetooth® hands-free connection...... 263 Electrical system...... 280 Wiper blades...... 223 Three-way catalytic converter...... 281 Battery...... 224 Overview of information and warning sym- Replacing bulbs...... 226 bols...... 282 Fuses09...... 234 10 Volvo programs...... 11 284

Information Provided by:Provided Information 7 Contents

12 Index Index...... 12 286

Information Provided by:Provided Information 8 Contents

Information Provided by:Provided Information 9 Introduction

Important information

Contacting Volvo About this manual Decals In the USA: There are various types of decals in the vehicle • Before you operate your vehicle for the first whose purpose is to provide important infor- time, please familiarize yourself with the Volvo Cars of North America, LLC mation in a clear and concise way. The impor- information found in the chapters "Instru- Customer Care Center tance of these decals is explained as follows, ments and controls" and "Starting and in descending order of importance. 1 Volvo Drive, driving." P.O. Box 914 • Information contained in the balance of the Risk of injury manual is extremely useful and should be Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 read after operating the vehicle for the first 1-800-458-1552 time. www.volvocars.us • The manual is structured so that it can be used for reference. For this reason, it In Canada: should be kept in the vehicle for ready access. Volvo Cars of Canada Corp Footnotes National Customer Service Certain pages of this manual contain informa- 175 Gordon Baker Road tion in the form of footnotes at the bottom of the page. This information supplements the North York, Ontario M2H 2N7 text that the footnote number refers to (a letter is used if the footnote refers to text in a table). 1-800-663-8255 G031590 www.volvocars.ca Display texts There are several displays in the driver’s field Black ISO symbols on a yellow warning back- of vision that show messages generated by ground, white text/image on a black back- various systems and functions in the vehicle. ground. Decals of this type are used to indicate These texts are indicated in the Owner’s Man- potential danger. Ignoring a warning of this ual by being in slightly larger type than the sur- type could result in serious injury or death. rounding text and are printed in gray, (for example: Selezione rete).

Information Provided by:Provided Information 10 Introduction

Important information

Risk of damage to the vehicle Information Types of lists used in the manual Procedures Procedures (step-by-step instructions), or actions that must be carried out in a certain order, are arranged in numbered lists in this manual. If there is a series of illustrations associated with step-by-step instructions, each step in the procedure is numbered in the same way as the corresponding illustration. Lists in which letters are used can be found with series of illustrations in cases where the order in which the instructions are car- G031592 G031593 ried out is not important. Arrows with or without numbers are used White ISO symbols and white text/image on a White ISO symbols and white text/image on a to indicate the direction of a movement. black or blue warning background and space black background. These decals provide gen- for a message. If the information on decals of eral information. If there are no illustrations associated with a this type is ignored, damage to the vehicle step-by-step list, the steps in the procedure could result. NOTE are indicated by ordinary numbers. Position lists The decals shown in the Owner’s Manual are examples only and are not intended to Red circles containing a number are used be reproductions of the decals actually used in general overview illustrations in which in the vehicle. The purpose is to give an indi- certain components are pointed out. The cation of how they look and their approxi- corresponding number is also used in the mate location in the vehicle. The applicable position list's description of the various information for your particular vehicle can components. be found on the respective decals in the vehicle.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 11 Introduction

Important information

Bullet lists NOTE WARNING Bullets are used to differentiate a number of components/functions/points of information • All information, illustrations and specifi- CALIFORNIA proposition 65 that can be listed in random order. cations contained in this manual are Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, based on the latest product information and certain vehicle components contain or For example: available at the time of publication. emit chemicals known to the state of Cali- • Coolant • Volvo reserves the right to make model fornia to cause cancer, and birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain • Engine oil changes at any time, or to change specifications or design without notice and fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or without incurring obligation. Continued emit chemicals known to the State of Cali- This symbol can be found at the lower right • Do not export your Volvo to another fornia to cause cancer, and birth defects or corner of an odd-numbered (right-hand) page country before investigating that coun- other reproductive harm. to indicate that the current topic is continued try's applicable safety and emission on the following page. control requirements. In some cases it may be difficult or impossible to comply WARNING Options and accessories with these requirements. Modifications Certain components of this vehicle such as Optional or accessory equipment described in to the emission control system(s) may air bag modules, seat belt pretensioners, this manual is indicated by an asterisk. render your Volvo not certifiable for adaptive steering columns, and button cell legal operation in the U.S., Canada and batteries may contain Perchlorate material. Optional or accessory equipment may not be other countries. Special handling may apply for service or available in all countries or markets. Please vehicle end of life disposal. note that some vehicles may be equipped dif- See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ ferently, depending on special legal require- WARNING perchlorate. ments. If your vehicle is involved in an accident, Contact your Volvo retailer for additional infor- unseen damage may affect its drivability mation. and safety.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 12 Introduction

Important information

Shiftlock (automatic transmission) Fuel filler cap Vehicle event data (Black box) When your vehicle is parked, the gear selector The fuel filler door, located on the right rear Your vehicle's driving and safety systems is locked in the P (Park) position. To release the quarter panel, is connected to your vehicle's employ computers that monitor, and share selector from this position, turn the ignition key central locking system. with each other, information about your vehi- to position II (or start the engine), depress the cle's operation. One or more of these comput- brake pedal, press the button on the front side Points to keep in mind ers may store what they monitor, either during of the gear selector and move the selector from • Do not export your Volvo to another coun- normal vehicle operation or in a crash or near- try before investigating that country's P (Park). crash event. Stored information may be read applicable safety and exhaust emission and used by: Keylock (automatic transmission) requirements. In some cases it may be dif- When you switch off the ignition, the gear ficult or impossible to comply with these • Volvo Car Corporation selector must be in the P (Park) position before requirements. Modifications to the emis- • service and repair facilities sion control system(s) may render your the remote key can be removed from the igni- • law enforcement or government agencies tion switch. Volvo not certifiable for legal operation in the U.S., Canada and other countries. • others who may assert a legal right to Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) • All information, illustrations and specifica- know, or who obtain your consent to know The ABS system in your vehicle performs a tions contained in this manual are based on such information. self-diagnostic test when the vehicle first rea- the latest product information available at ches the speed of approximately 12 mph the time of publication. Please note that (20 km/h). The brake pedal will pulsate several some vehicles may be equipped differ- times and a sound may be audible from the ently, depending on special legal require- ABS control module. This is normal. ments. Optional equipment described in this manual may not be available in all mar- Fuel filler door kets. Press the button on the light switch panel (see • Volvo reserves the right to make model the illustration on page 66) when the vehicle changes at any time, or to change specifi- is at a standstill to unlock the fuel filler door. cations or design without notice and with- Please note that the fuel filler door will remain out incurring obligation. unlocked until the vehicle begins to move forward. An audible click will be heard when the fuel filler door relocks.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 13 Introduction

Environment

Volvo and the environment continuous environmental refinement of con- Recycling Volvo is committed to the well being of its cus- ventional gasoline-powered internal combus- As part of Volvo’s commitment to the environ- tomers. As a natural part of this commitment, tion engines, Volvo is actively looking at ment, it is essential for the vehicle to be recy- we care about the environment in which we all advanced technology alternative-fuel vehicles. cled in an environmentally sound way. Almost live. Caring for the environment means an the entire vehicle can be recycled and for that everyday involvement in reducing our environ- When you drive a Volvo, you become our part- reason, the vehicle’s final owner is requested mental impact. Volvo's environmental activities ner in the work to lessen the car's impact on to contact a Volvo retailer for information about are based on a holistic view, which means we the environment. To reduce your vehicle's approved and certified recycling facilities. consider the overall environmental impact of a environmental impact, you can: product throughout its complete life cycle. In • Maintain proper air pressure in your tires. this context, design, production, product use, Tests have shown decreased fuel econ- and recycling are all important considerations. omy with improperly inflated tires. In production, Volvo has partly or completely • Follow the recommended maintenance phased out several chemicals including CFCs, schedule in your Warranty and Service lead chromates, asbestos, and cadmium; and Records Information booklet. reduced the number of chemicals used in our • Drive at a constant speed whenever pos- plants 50% since 1991. sible. Volvo was the first in the world to introduce into • See a trained and qualified Volvo service production a three-way catalytic converter with technician as soon as possible for inspec- a Lambda sond, now called the heated oxygen tion if the check engine (malfunction indi- sensor, in 1976. The current version of this cator) light illuminates, or stays on after the highly efficient system reduces emissions of vehicle has started. harmful substances (CO, HC, NOx) from the • Properly dispose of any vehicle-related exhaust pipe by approximately 95 – 99% and waste such as used motor oil, used batter- the search to eliminate the remaining emis- ies, brake pads, etc. sions continues. Volvo is the only automobile When cleaning your vehicle, please use manufacturer to offer CFC-free retrofit kits for • genuine Volvo car care products. All Volvo the air conditioning system of all models as far car care products are formulated to be back as the 1975 model 240. Advanced elec- environmentally friendly. tronic engine controls and cleaner fuels are bringing us closer to our goal. In addition to

Information Provided by:Provided Information 14 Introduction

Important warnings

Driver distraction cellular telephone use by a driver while the • Accessories that have not been approved A driver has a responsibility to do everything vehicle is moving. by Volvo may or may not be specifically possible to ensure his or her own safety and • If your vehicle is equipped with a naviga- tested for compatibility with your vehicle. the safety of passengers in the vehicle and oth- tion system, set and make changes to your Additionally, an inexperienced installer may not be familiar with some of your car's ers sharing the roadway. Avoiding distractions travel itinerary only with the vehicle parked. systems. is part of that responsibility. • Never program your audio system while the vehicle is moving. Program radio pre- • Any of your car's performance and safety Driver distraction results from driver activities systems could be adversely affected if you that are not directly related to controlling the sets with the vehicle parked, and use your programmed presets to make radio use install accessories that Volvo has not tes- vehicle in the driving environment. Your new quicker and simpler. ted, or if you allow accessories to be instal- Volvo is, or can be, equipped with many fea- led by someone unfamiliar with your vehi- ture-rich entertainment and communication • Never use portable computers or personal cle. systems. These include hands-free cellular tel- digital assistants while the vehicle is moving. • Damage caused by unapproved or ephones, navigation systems, and multipur- improperly installed accessories may not pose audio systems. You may also own other be covered by your new vehicle warranty. portable electronic devices for your own con- Accessory installation See your Warranty and Service Records venience. When used properly and safely, they • We strongly recommend that Volvo owners Information booklet for more warranty enrich the driving experience. Improperly used, install only genuine, Volvo-approved information. Volvo assumes no responsi- any of these could cause a distraction. accessories, and that accessory installa- bility for death, injury, or expenses that For all of these systems, we want to provide the tions be performed only by a trained and may result from the installation of non-gen- following warning that reflects the strong Volvo qualified Volvo service technician. uine accessories. concern for your safety. Never use these devi- • Genuine Volvo accessories are tested to ces or any feature of your vehicle in a way that ensure compatibility with the performance, distracts you from the task of driving safely. safety, and emission systems in your vehi- Distraction can lead to a serious accident. In cle. Additionally, a trained and qualified addition to this general warning, we offer the Volvo service technician knows where following guidance regarding specific newer accessories may and may not be safely features that may be found in your vehicle: installed in your Volvo. In all cases, please consult a trained and qualified Volvo serv- • Never use a hand-held cellular telephone ice technician before installing any acces- while driving. Some jurisdictions prohibit sory in or on your vehicle.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 15 Occupant safety...... 18 Seat belts...... 20 Supplemental Restraint System...... 24 Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS)...... 29 Side impact protection airbags...... 32 Door Mounted Inflatable Curtain system (DMIC) ...... 34 Whiplash Protection System...... 35 Roll-over Protection system (ROPS) ...... 37 Crash mode...... 38 Child safety...... 39 Child restraint systems...... 41 Infant seats...... 43 Convertible seats...... 45 Booster cushions...... 47 ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors...... 48

Information Provided by:Provided Information 16 SAFETY

Information Provided by:Provided Information 01 Safety

01 Occupant safety

Volvo's concern for safety • Never drink and drive. tion, and if it finds that a safety defect Safety is Volvo's cornerstone. Our concern • If you are taking any medication, consult exists in a group of vehicles, it may dates back to 1927 when the first Volvo rolled your physician about its potential effects order a recall and remedy campaign. on your driving abilities. off the production line. Three-point seat belts However, NHTSA cannot become (a Volvo invention), safety cages, and energy- • Take a driver-retraining course. absorbing impact zones were designed into involved in individual problems • Have your eyes checked regularly. Volvo cars long before it was fashionable or between you, your retailer, or Volvo required by government regulation. • Keep your windshield and headlights Cars of North America, LLC. To con- clean. We will not compromise our commitment to tact NHTSA, you may either call the Replace wiper blades when they start to safety. We continue to seek out new safety • leave streaks. Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at features and to refine those already in our cars. 1-888-327-4236 You can help. We would appreciate hearing • Take into account the traffic, road, and your suggestions about improving automobile weather conditions, particularly with (TTY: 1-800-424-9153) or write to: safety. We also want to know if you ever have regard to stopping distance. NHTSA, U.S. Department of Trans- a safety concern with your car. Call us in the • Never send text messages while driving. portation, Washington D.C. 20590. U.S. at: 1-800-458-1552 or in Canada at: • Refrain from using or minimize the use of a 1-800-663-8255. cell phone while driving. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from: Occupant safety reminders Reporting safety defects in the U.S. http://www.safercar.gov How safely you drive doesn't depend on how If you believe that your vehicle has a old you are but rather on: Volvo strongly recommends that if defect which could cause a crash or your vehicle is covered under a serv- • How well you see. could cause injury or death, you ice campaign, safety or emission • Your ability to concentrate. should immediately inform the recall or similar action, it should be • How quickly you make decisions under National Highway Traffic Safety completed as soon as possible. stress to avoid an accident. Administration (NHTSA) in addition to The following suggestions are intended to help Please check with your local retailer notifying Volvo Cars of North Amer- or Volvo Cars of North America, LLC you cope with the ever changing traffic envi- ica, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar ronment. if your vehicle is covered under these complaints, it may open an investiga- conditions.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 18 01 Safety

Occupant safety 01

NHTSA can be reached at: Internet: http://www.nhtsa.gov Telephone: 1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236).

Reporting safety defects in Canada If you believe your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Trans- port Canada in addition to notifying Volvo Cars of Canada Corp. Transport Canada can be contacted at: 1-800-333-0510 Teletypewriter (TTY): 613 990-4500 Fax: 1-819-994-3372 Mailing Address: Transport Canada - Road Safety, 80 rue Noël, Gatineau, (Quebec) J8Z 0A1

Information Provided by:Provided Information 19 01 Safety

01 Seat belts

Using seat belts front or side impact airbags deploy, and in cer- NOTE tain impacts from the rear. The front seat belts also include a tension reducing device which, Each seat belt (except for the driver's belt) in the event of a collision, limits the peak forces is equipped with the ALR/ELR function, which is designed to help keep the seat belt exerted by the seat belt on the occupant. taut. ALR/ELR activates if the seat belt is pulled out as far as possible. If this is done, Buckling a seat belt a sound from the seat belt retractor will be Pull the belt out far enough to insert the latch audible, which is normal, and the seat belt plate into the receptacle until a distinct click is will be pulled taut and locked in place. This heard. The seat belt retractor is normally function is automatically disabled when the "unlocked" and you can move freely, provided seat belt is unbuckled and fully retracted. that the shoulder belt is not pulled out too far. See also page 40 for information about using NOTE a seat belt's ALR/ELR function to anchor a

G020104 The seat belt is easiest to reach by grasping child seat. it near the lower seat belt guide, not over the Adjusting the seat belt shoulder. When wearing the seat belt remember: Seat belts should always be worn by all occu- • The belt should not be twisted or turned. The lap section of the belt must be posi- pants of your vehicle. Children should be prop- The seat belt retractor will lock up in the fol- • tioned low on the hips (not pressing against erly restrained, using an infant, car, or booster lowing situations: seat determined by age, weight and height. the abdomen). • if the belt is pulled out rapidly Volvo also believes no child should sit in the • Make sure that the shoulder belt is rolled front seat of a vehicle. • during braking and acceleration up into its retractor and that the shoulder • if the vehicle is leaning excessively and lap belts are taut. Most states and provinces make it mandatory for occupants of a vehicle to use seat belts. • when driving in turns • if the Automatic Locking Retractor/Emer- Seat belt pretensioners gency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) is acti- All seat belts are equipped with pretensioners vated that reduce slack in the belts. These pretensioners are triggered in situations where the

Information Provided by:Provided Information 20 01 Safety

Seat belts 01

Routing the front seat belts1 WARNING Seat belt guides Never use a seat belt for more than one occupant. Never wear the shoulder portion of the belt under the arm, behind the back or otherwise out of position. Such use could cause injury in the event of an accident. As seat belts lose much of their strength when exposed to violent stretching, they should be replaced after any collision, even if they appear to be undamaged.

WARNING • Never repair the belt yourself; have this work done by a trained and qualified G020106 Volvo service technician only. Seat belt guides (on both front seats) The diagonal section of the seat belt should be • Any device used to induce slack into the routed over the seat occupant’s shoulder. shoulder belt portion of the three-point These guides are designed to help provide However, if the person’s height does not lift the belt system will have a detrimental easier access to the seat belts. A belt can be belt above the handle on the upper side of each effect on the amount of protection avail- taken out of the guide and slid to the rearmost front seat, the diagonal section of the seat belt able to you in the event of a collision. part of the lower seat belt anchorage rod to should be routed so that it rests on this handle • The seat back should not be tilted too make it easier for passengers to enter or exit (see the illustration). far back. The shoulder belt must be taut the rear seat. in order to function properly. Unbuckling the seat belt • Do not use child safety seats or child • To remove the seat belt, press the red sec- booster cushions/backrests in the front tion on the seat belt receptacle. Before passenger's seat. We also recommend exiting the vehicle, check that the seat belt that children who have outgrown these retracts fully after being unbuckled. If nec- devices sit in the rear seat with the seat essary, guide the belt back into the retrac- belt properly fastened. tor slot.

1 This handle is available on certain models only Information Provided by:Provided Information 21 01 Safety

01 Seat belts

Seat belt use during pregnancy steering wheel). Within this context, they seat belts. The audible signal and warning light should strive to position the seat with as large will be on for a total of 6 seconds from the time a distance as possible between their belly and the ignition is switched on, regardless of the steering wheel. whether or not the seat belts are fastened. If the front seat belts are unbuckled while the Child seats vehicle is in motion, the audible signal and Please refer to page 41 for information on warning light will be active for a total of 6 sec- securing child seats with the seat belts. onds. Rear seats Seat belt reminder The seat belt reminder in the rear seat has two additional functions: • It provides information about which seat belts are fastened in the rear seat. A mes- G020105 sage will appear in the information display when a belt is being used. This message The seat belt should always be worn during will disappear after approximately 6 sec- pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in the onds or can be erased by pressing the correct way. The diagonal section should wrap READ button on the left steering wheel over the shoulder then be routed between the lever. breasts and to the side of the belly. The lap • It also provides a reminder if one of the section should lay flat over the thighs and as occupants of the rear seat has unbuckled low as possible under the belly. It must never his/her seat belt while the vehicle is in be allowed to ride upward. Remove all slack motion. A visual and audible signal will be from the belt and insure that it fits close to the G029652 given. These signals will stop when the body without any twists. Seat belt reminder light in ceiling console seat belt has been re-buckled or can be stopped by pressing the READ button. As a pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers The seat belt reminder consists of an audible should adjust their seats and steering wheel signal, an indicator light near the rearview mir- The message in the information display can such that they can easily maintain control of the ror and a symbol in the instrument panel that always be accessed, even if it has been erased, vehicle as they drive (which means they must alert all occupants of the vehicle to fasten their by pressing the READ button to display stored be able to easily operate the foot pedals and messages.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 22 01 Safety

Seat belts 01

Seat belt maintenance Check periodically that the seat belts are in good condition. Use water and a mild detergent for cleaning. Check seat belt mechanism function as follows: attach the seat belt and pull rapidly on the strap.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 23 01 Safety

01 Supplemental Restraint System

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Where applicable, a text message will also be WARNING displayed when the SRS warning light illuminates. If this warning symbol is not functioning If your vehicle has been subjected to flood properly, the general warning symbol illumi- conditions (e.g. soaked carpeting/standing water on the floor of the vehicle) or if your nates and either SRS AIRBAG SERVICE vehicle has become flood-damaged in any URGENT or SRS AIRBAG SERVICE way, do not attempt to start the vehicle or REQUIREDwill be displayed. put the key in the ignition before disconnecting the battery (see below). This may WARNING cause airbag deployment which could result in personal injury. Have the vehicle towed to • If the SRS warning light stays on after a trained and qualified Volvo service tech- the engine has started or if it illuminates nician for repairs. while you are driving, have the vehicle Automatic transmission inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician as soon as Before attempting to tow the vehicle, use G026330 possible. the following procedure to override the shiftlock system to move the gear selector SRS warning light • Never try to repair any component or to the neutral position: part of the SRS yourself. Any interfer- As an enhancement to the three-point seat 1. Switch off the ignition for at least ence in the system could cause mal- belts, your Volvo is equipped with a Supple- 10 minutes and disconnect the battery. function and serious injury. All work on mental Restraint System (SRS). Volvo's SRS these systems should be performed by 2. Wait at least one minute. consists of seat belt pretensioners, front air- a trained and qualified Volvo service bags, side impact airbags, the occupant 3. Insert the key in the ignition and turn it technician. weight sensor, and door-mounted inflatable to position II. curtains. All of these systems are monitored by 4. Press firmly on the brake pedal. the SRS control module. An SRS warning light 5. Move the gear selector from Park (P) to in the instrument panel (see the illustration) illu- the Neutral (N) position, see page 153, minates when the ignition key is turned to posi- for information on manually overriding tion I, II, or III, and will normally go out after the shiftlock system. approximately 7 seconds if no faults are detected in the system.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 24 01 Safety

Supplemental Restraint System 01

The front airbag system • The driver's side front airbag is folded and located in the steering wheel hub. • The passenger's side front airbag is folded behind a panel located above the glove compartment.

WARNING • The airbags in the vehicle are designed to be a SUPPLEMENT to-not a replacement for-the three-point seat belts. For maximum protection, wear seat belts at all times. Be aware that no system can

G020111 prevent all possible injuries that may G015167 occur in an accident. The front airbags supplement the three-point Location of the passenger's side front airbag • Never drive a vehicle with your hands on seat belts. For these airbags to provide the As the movement of the seats' occupants com- the steering wheel pad/airbag housing. protection intended, seat belts must be worn presses the airbags, some of the gas is expel- • The front airbags are designed to help at all times. led at a controlled rate to provide better cush- prevent serious injury. Deployment The front airbag system includes gas genera- ioning. Both seat belt pretensioners also occurs very quickly and with consider- tors surrounded by the airbags, and decelera- deploy, minimizing seat belt slack. The entire able force. During normal deployment tion sensors that activate the gas generators, process, including inflation and deflation of the and depending on variables such as seating position, one may experience causing the airbags to be inflated with nitrogen airbags, takes approximately one fifth of a sec- abrasions, bruises, swellings, or other gas. ond. injuries as a result from deployment of The location of the front airbags is indicated by one or both of the airbags. SRS AIRBAG embossed on the steering wheel pad and above the glove compartment, and by • When installing any accessory equip- decals on both sun visors and on the front and ment, make sure that the front airbag system is not damaged. Any interfer- far right side of the dash. ence in the system could cause malfunction.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 25 01 Safety

01 Supplemental Restraint System

Front airbag deployment NOTE Volvo Cars of North America, LLC The front airbags are designed to deploy • Deployment of front airbags occurs only Customer Care Center during certain frontal or front-angular col- • one time during an accident. In a colli- lisions, impacts, or decelerations, depend- 1 Volvo Drive sion where deployment occurs, the air- ing on the crash severity, angle, speed and bags and seat belt pretensioners acti- P.O. Box 914 object impacted. The airbags may also vate. Some noise occurs and a small deploy in certain non-frontal collisions Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 amount of powder is released. The where rapid deceleration occurs. release of the powder may appear as 1-800-458-1552 • The SRS sensors, which trigger the front smoke-like matter. This is a normal www.volvocars.us airbags, are designed to react to both the characteristic and does not indicate fire. impact of the collision and the inertial In Canada Volvo's front airbags use special sen- forces generated by it, and to determine if • sors that are integrated with the front Volvo Cars of Canada Corp. the intensity of the collision is sufficient for seat buckles. The point at which the air- the seat belt pretensioners and/or airbags National Customer Service bag deploys is determined by whether to be deployed. or not the seat belt is being used, as well 175 Gordon Baker Road However, not all frontal collisions activate the as the severity of the collision. front airbags. North York, Ontario M2H 2N7 • Collisions can occur where only one of • If the collision involves a nonrigid object the airbags deploys. If the impact is less 1-800-663-8255 (e.g., a snow drift or bush), or a rigid, fixed severe, but severe enough to present a www.volvocars.ca object at a low speed, the front airbags will clear injury risk, the airbags are trig- not necessarily deploy. gered at partial capacity. If the impact is • Front airbags do not normally deploy in a more severe, the airbags are triggered side impact collision, in a collision from the at full capacity. rear or in a rollover situation. • The amount of damage to the bodywork Should you have questions about any compo- does not reliably indicate if the airbags nent in the SRS system, please contact a should have deployed or not. trained and qualified Volvo service technician or Volvo customer support: In the USA

Information Provided by:Provided Information 26 01 Safety

Supplemental Restraint System 01

WARNING • Do not use child safety seats or child booster cushions/backrests in the front passenger's seat. We also recommend that occupants under 4 feet 7 inches (140 cm) in height who have outgrown these devices sit in the rear seat with the seat belt fastened1. • Never drive with the airbags deployed. The fact that they hang out can impair the steering of your vehicle. Other safety systems can also be damaged.

• The smoke and dust formed when the G032934 airbags are deployed can cause skin Passenger's side airbag decal Airbag decal on the outside of both sun visors and eye irritation in the event of prolonged exposure.

1 See also the Occupant Weight Sensor information on page 29. Information Provided by:Provided Information 27 01 Safety

01 Supplemental Restraint System

WARNING WARNING • Children must never be allowed in the • No objects or accessory equipment, front passenger's seat. e.g. dashboard covers, may be placed • Occupants in the front passenger's seat on, attached to, or installed near the air must never sit on the edge of the seat, bag hatch (the area above the glove sit leaning toward the instrument panel compartment) or the area affected by or otherwise sit out of position. airbag deployment. • The occupant's back must be as upright • There should be no loose articles, e.g. as comfort allows and be against the coffee cups, on the floor, seat, or dash- seat back with the seat belt properly board area. fastened. • Never try to open the airbag cover on • Feet must be on the floor, e.g., not on the steering wheel or the passenger's the dash, seat or out of the window. side dashboard. This should only be done by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. • Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury to the vehicle occupants.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 28 01 Safety

Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) 01

Disabling the passenger's side front not inflate) the passenger's side front airbag The OWS uses a PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF airbag under certain conditions. indicator lamp which will illuminate and stay on to remind you that the passenger's side front The OWS works with sensors that are part of airbag is disabled. The the front passenger's seat and seat belt. The PASSENGER AIRBAG indicator lamp is located in the overhead sensors are designed to detect the presence of OFF console, near the base of the rearview mirror. a properly seated occupant and determine if the passenger's side front airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or disabled (will not NOTE inflate). When the ignition is switched on, the OWS The OWS will disable (will not inflate) the pas- indicator light will go on for up to 10 seconds while the system performs a self-diagnostic senger's side front airbag when: test. • the front passenger's seat is unoccupied, or has small/medium objects in the front However, if a fault is detected in the system: seat,

G018346 The OWS indicator light will stay on • the system determines that an infant is • The SRS warning light (see page 24) will Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) indicator light present in a rear-facing infant seat that is • installed according to the manufacturer's come on and stay on Volvo recommends that ALL occupants (adults instructions, The message PASS. AIRBAG OFF SERVICE and children) shorter than 4 feet 7 inches the system determines that a small child is URGENT will be displayed in the information (140 cm) be seated in the rear seat of any vehi- • present in a forward-facing child restraint display. cle with a passenger's side front airbag, and be that is installed according to the manufac- properly restrained. Children should always be turer's instructions, seated in child restraints appropriate for their size and weight. See also the child safety rec- • the system determines that a small child is ommendations on page 39. present in a booster seat, • a front passenger takes his/her weight off The Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) is of the seat for a period of time, designed to meet the regulatory requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard • a child or a small person occupies the front (FMVSS) 208 and is designed to disable (will passenger's seat.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 29 01 Safety

01 Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS)

WARNING passenger's side front airbag is disabled (see person of adult size is sitting properly in the the following table). front passenger's seat. The PASSENGER If a fault in the system is detected and indi- AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp will be off and cated as explained on the preceding page, remain off. be aware that the passenger's side front air- Passenger's OWS indica- Passenger's bag will not deploy in the event of a collision. seat occu- tor light sta- side front If a person of adult size is sitting in the front In this case, the SRS system and Occupant pancy status tus airbag sta- passenger's seat, but the PASSENGER Weight Sensor should be inspected by a tus AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is on, it is possible trained and qualified Volvo service techni- that the person isn't sitting properly in the seat. cian as soon as possible. Seat unoc- OWS indica- Passenger's If this happens: cupied tor light side front lights airbag disa- 1. Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to WARNING up bled place the seatback in an upright position. • Never try to open, remove, or repair any 2. Have the person sit upright in the seat, Seat occu- OWS indica- Passenger's components in the OWS system. This centered on the seat cushion, with the per- could result in system malfunction. pied by low tor light side front son's legs comfortably extended. Maintenance or repairs should only be weight lights airbag disa- carried out by an a trained and qualified occupant/ up bled 3. Restart the vehicle and have the person Volvo service technician. objectA remain in this position for about two • The front passenger's seat should not minutes. This will allow the system to Seat occu- OWS indica- Passenger's be modified in any way. This could detect that person and enable the pas- reduce pressure on the seat cushion, pied by tor light side front senger's frontal airbag. heavy occu- is not airbag ena- which might interfere with the OWS sys- 4. If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator pant/object lit bled tem's function. lamp remains on even after this, the person A Volvo recommends that children always be properly should be advised to ride in the rear seat. The OWS is designed to disable (will not inflate) restrained in appropriate child restraints in the rear seats. Do not assume that the passenger's side front airbag is disabled This condition reflects limitations of the OWS the passenger's side front airbag when a rear unless the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is lit. classification capability. It does not indicate facing infant seat, a forward-facing child Make sure the child restraint is properly installed. If there is any doubt as to the status of the passenger's side front air- OWS malfunction. restraint, or a booster seat is detected. The bag, move the child restraint to the rear seat. PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp will The OWS is designed to enable (may inflate) Modifications illuminate and stay on to remind you that the the passenger's side front airbag in the event If you are considering modifying your vehicle in of a collision anytime the system senses that a any way to accommodate a disability, for

Information Provided by:Provided Information 30 01 Safety

Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) 01 example by altering or adapting the driver's or WARNING WARNING front passenger's seat(s) and/or airbag systems, please contact Volvo at: • No objects that add to the total weight Keep the following points in mind with on the seat should be placed on the respect to the OWS system. Failure to follow In the USA front passenger's seat. If a child is these instructions could adversely affect the system's function and result in serious injury Volvo Cars of North America, LLC seated in the front passenger's seat with any additional weight, this extra to the occupant of the front passenger's Customer Care Center weight could cause the OWS system to seat: 1 Volvo Drive enable the airbag, which might cause it • The full weight of the front seat passen- to deploy in the event of a collision, ger should always be on the seat cush- P.O. Box 914 thereby injuring the child. ion. The passenger should never lift Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 • The seat belt should never be wrapped him/herself off the seat cushion using around an object on the front passeng- the armrest in the door or the center 1-800-458-1552 er's seat. This could interfere with the console, by pressing the feet on the In Canada OWS system's function. floor, by sitting on the edge of the seat cushion, or by pressing against the Volvo Cars of Canada Corp. • The front passenger's seat belt should backrest in a way that reduces pressure never be used in a way that exerts more National Customer Service on the seat cushion. This could cause pressure on the passenger than normal. OWS to disable the passenger's side 175 Gordon Baker Road North York, Ontario This could increase the pressure exer- front airbag. M2H 2N7 ted on the weight sensor by a child, and could result in the airbag being enabled, • Do not place any type of object on the 1-800-663-8255 which might cause it to deploy in the front passenger's seat in such a way event of a collision, thereby injuring the that jamming, pressing, or squeezing child. occurs between the object and the front seat, other than as a direct result of the correct use of the Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retrac- tor (ALR/ELR) seat belt, see page 40. • No objects should be placed under the front passenger's seat. This could interfere with the OWS system's function.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 31 01 Safety

01 Side impact protection airbags

Side impact airbags – front seats only NOTE SIPS airbag deployment (one airbag) occurs only on the side of the vehicle affected by the impact. The airbags are not designed to deploy in all side impact situations.

Components in the SIPS airbag system This SIPS airbag system consists of gas generators and side airbag modules built into the outboard sides of both front seat backrests. G025315

G020118 Driver's side SIPS airbag Location of the side impact (SIPS) airbag As an enhancement to the structural side impact protection built into your car, the car is also equipped with Side Impact Protection System (SIPS) airbags. The SIPS airbag system is designed to help increase occupant protection in the event of certain side impact collisions. The SIPS airbags are designed to deploy only during certain side-impact collisions, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and point of impact. G025316

Passenger's side SIPS airbag

Information Provided by:Provided Information 32 01 Safety

Side impact protection airbags 01

WARNING • The SIPS airbag system is a supplement to the structural Side Impact Pro- tection System and the three-point seat belt system. It is not designed to deploy during collisions from the front or rear of the car or in rollover situations. • The use of seat covers on the front seats may impede SIPS airbag deployment. • No objects, accessory equipment or stickers may be placed on, attached to or installed near the SIPS airbag system or in the area affected by SIPS airbag deployment. • Never try to open or repair any components of the SIPS airbag system. This should be done only by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. • In order for the SIPS airbag to provide its best protection, both front seat occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belt properly fastened. • Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury to the occupants of the vehicle in the event of an accident.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 33 01 Safety

01 Door Mounted Inflatable Curtain system (DMIC)

WARNING • The DMIC system is a supplement to the Side Impact Protection System. It is not designed to deploy during collisions from the front or rear of the vehicle. It only provides protection for the occupants of the front seats. • There is a risk of injury if the driver or front seat passenger leans on or against the door panel when the DMIC deploys. • Never install or mount any equipment on the insides of the doors, door pillars,

G025425 or side panels. This could impede the G025424 function of the DMIC system. The DMIC is a supplement to the structural side • Never try to open or repair any compo- impact protection. These inflatable curtains are nents of the DMIC system. This should WARNING concealed in the upper section of both doors. be done only by a trained and qualified In order for the DMIC to provide its best The Inflatable Curtain (DMIC) and the Side Volvo service technician. protection, both front seat occupants • should sit in an upright position with the seat Impact Airbag System (SIPS airbag) will belt properly fastened; adults using the seat both deploy in certain side impacts. The belt and children using the proper child DMIC is also designed to deploy in rollover restraint system. Only adults should sit in situations. the front seats. Children must never be • DMIC deployment can occur regardless of allowed in the front passenger seat. See whether the power retractable hard top is page 40 for guidelines. Failure to follow up or down. these instructions can result in injury to the vehicle occupants in an accident.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 34 01 Safety

Whiplash Protection System 01

Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS) – front seats only G020347

The WHIPS system consists of specially WARNING WARNING designed hinges and brackets on the front seat backrests designed to help absorb some of the • The WHIPS system is designed to sup- • Occupants in the front seats must never energy generated in a collision from the rear plement the other safety systems in sit out of position. The occupant's back (when the vehicle is "rear-ended"). your car. For this system to function must be as upright as comfort allows properly, the three-point seat belt must and be against the seat back with the In the event of a collision of this type, the hinges be worn. Please be aware that no sys- seat belt properly fastened. and brackets of the front seat backrests are tem can prevent all possible injuries that • If your car has been involved in a rear- designed to change position slightly to allow may occur in an accident. end collision, the front seat backrests the backrest/head restraint to help support the • The WHIPS system is designed to func- must be inspected by a trained and occupant's head before moving slightly rear- tion in certain collisions from the rear, qualified Volvo service technician, even ward. This movement helps absorb some of depending on the crash severity, angle if the seats appear to be undamaged. the forces that could result in whiplash. and speed.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 35 01 Safety

01 Whiplash Protection System

Certain components in the WHIPS system may need to be replaced. • Do not attempt to service any component in the WHIPS system yourself. G020125

WARNING Boxes, suitcases, etc. wedged behind the front seats could impede the function of the WHIPS system.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 36 01 Safety

Roll-over Protection system (ROPS) 01

Introduction NOTE If ROPS has deployed, the system should be inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

WARNING • The rear seat of the Volvo C70 is intended for two occupants, and only two rear seat belts are provided. The center section of the seat should never be used to seat a passenger. • No objects should be placed over the roll bars or behind the rear seat head G020797 restraints. Deployed ROPS roll bars • All repairs or maintenance to the ROPS The ROPS system consists of two roll bars system should only be performed by a located behind the rear seat head restraints, trained and qualified Volvo service tech- and a sensor that monitors the roll or pitch nician. angle of the vehicle. If the vehicle rolls or pitches beyond a preset angle, or in the event of a rear-end collision of sufficient force, the roll bars are automatically deployed (raised). The ROPS system is designed to function regardless of whether the power retractable hard top is up or down. By design, the tops of the roll bars are equipped with a point in order to pierce the rear window if the top is up.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 37 01 Safety

01 Crash mode

Driving after a collision fuel lines, sensors for one of the safety sys- 3. Try to start the vehicle. tems, the brake system, etc. Moving the vehicle WARNING If the electrical system is able to reset system status to normal (CRASH MODE SEE • Never attempt to repair the vehicle MANUAL will no longer be displayed), the yourself or to reset the electrical system vehicle may be moved carefully from its pres- after the vehicle has displayed CRASH ent position, if for example, it is blocking traffic. MODE SEE MANUAL. This could It should, however, not be moved farther than result in injury or improper system func- is absolutely necessary. tion. • Restoring the vehicle to normal operat- WARNING ing mode should only be done by a trained and qualified Volvo service tech- Even if the vehicle appears to be drivable nician. after CRASH MODE has been set, it should G026363 not be driven or towed (pulled by another • After CRASH MODE SEE MANUAL vehicle). There may be concealed damage If the vehicle has been involved in a collision, has been displayed, if you detect the that could make it difficult or impossible to control. The vehicle should be transported the text CRASH MODE SEE MANUAL may odor of fuel vapor, or see any signs of fuel leakage, do not attempt to start the on a flatbed tow truck to a trained and quali- appear in the information display. This indi- vehicle. Leave the vehicle immediately. fied Volvo service technician for inspection/ cates that the vehicle's functionality has been repairs. reduced. Attempting to start the vehicle This text can only be shown if the display is If damage to the vehicle is minor and there is undamaged and the vehicle's electrical system no fuel leakage, you may attempt to start the is intact. vehicle. To do so: CRASH MODE is a feature that is triggered if 1. Remove the ignition key or optional keyless one or more of the safety systems (for example, drive start control, see page 149. front or side airbags, an inflatable curtain, or one or more of the seat belt pretensioners) has 2. Reinsert the key or start control in the igni- deployed. The collision may have damaged an tion switch. The vehicle will then attempt to important function in the vehicle, such as the reset CRASH MODE to normal mode.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 38 01 Safety

Child safety 01

Children should be seated safely restrained to help reduce the chance of injuring When a child has outgrown the child safety Volvo recommends the proper use of restraint or increasing the injury of a child. seat, you should use the rear seat with the standard seat belt fastened. The best way to systems for all occupants including children. All states and provinces have legislation gov- help protect the child here is to place the child Remember that, regardless of age and size, a erning how and where children should be car- on a cushion so that the seat belt is properly child should always be properly restrained in a ried in a car. Find out the regulations existing located on the hips (see the illustration on page car. in your state or province. Recent accident sta- 47). Legislation in your state or province may tistics have shown that children are safer in rear Your car is also equipped with ISOFIX/LATCH mandate the use of a child seat or cushion in seating positions than front seating positions attachments, which make it more convenient combination with the seat belt, depending on when properly restrained. A child restraint sys- to install child seats. the child's age and/or size. Please check local tem can help protect a child in a vehicle. Here's regulations. Some restraint systems for children are what to look for when selecting a child restraint designed to be secured in the vehicle by lap system: A specially designed and tested booster cush- belts or the lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt. ion and backrest can be obtained from your • It should have a label certifying that it Such child restraint systems can help protect Volvo retailer. children in cars in the event of an accident only meets applicable Federal Motor Vehicle if they are used properly. However, children Safety Standards (FMVSS 213) – or in Can- USA: for children weighing 33–80 lbs. (15– could be endangered in a crash if the child ada, CMVSS 213. 36 kg) and 38–54 inches (97–137 cm) in height restraints are not properly secured in the vehi- • Make sure the child restraint system is Canada: for children weighing 40–80 lbs. (18– cle. Failure to follow the installation instructions approved for the child's height, weight and 36 kg) and 40–54 inches (102–137 cm) in height for your child restraint can result in your child development – the label required by the striking the vehicle's interior in a sudden stop. standard or regulation, or instructions for infant restraints, typically provide this infor- WARNING Holding a child in your arms is NOT a suitable mation. Do not use child safety seats or child substitute for a child restraint system. In an In using any child restraint system, we urge booster cushions/backrests in the front accident, a child held in a person's arms can • you to carefully look over the instructions passenger's seat. We also recommend that be crushed between the vehicle's interior and that are provided with the restraint. Be sure children under 4 feet 7 inches (140 cm) in height who have outgrown these devices sit an unrestrained person. The child could also be you understand them and can use the in the rear seat with the seat belt fastened. injured by striking the interior, or by being ejec- device properly and safely in this vehicle. ted from the vehicle during a sudden maneuver A misused child restraint system can result or impact. The same can also happen if the in increased injuries for both the infant or Child seat should always be registered. See infant or child rides unrestrained on the seat. child and other occupants in the vehicle. page 40 for more information. Other occupants should also be properly

Information Provided by:Provided Information 39 01 Safety

01 Child safety

Automatic Locking Retractor/ WARNING Volvo recommends that you do not dis- Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ connect the airbag system in your vehicle. ELR) Do not use child safety seats or child booster cushions/backrests in the front • Volvo strongly recommends that everyone To make child seat installation easier, each passenger's seat. We also recommend that in the vehicle be properly restrained. seat belt (except for the driver's belt) is equip- children who have outgrown these devices • Volvo recommends that ALL occupants ped with a locking mechanism to help keep the sit in the rear seat with the seat belt properly (adults and children) shorter than 4 feet seat belt taut. fastened. 7 inches (140 cm) be seated in the back seat of any vehicle with a front passenger When attaching the seat belt to a child side airbag. Volvo's recommendations seat: • Drive safely! 1. Attach the seat belt to the child seat Why does Volvo believe that no child should sit according to the child seat manufacturer's in the front seat of a car? It's quite simple really. instructions. A front airbag is a very powerful device Child restraint registration and recalls designed, by law, to help protect an adult. 2. Pull the seat belt out as far as possible. Registering a child restraint Because of the size of the airbag and its speed 3. Insert the seat belt latch plate into the Child restraints could be recalled for safety of inflation, a child should never be placed in buckle (lock) in the usual way. reasons. You must register your child restraint the front seat, even if he or she is properly bel- to be reached in a recall. To stay informed 4. Release the seat belt and pull it taut around ted or strapped into a child safety seat. Volvo about child safety seat recalls, be sure to fill out the child seat. has been an innovator in safety for over sev- and return the registration card that comes A sound from the seat belt retractor will be enty-five years, and we'll continue to do our with new child restraints. part. But we need your help. Please remember audible at this time and is normal. The belt will Child restraint recall information is readily avail- to put your children in the back seat, and now be locked in place. This function is auto- able in both the U.S. and Canada. For recall buckle them up. matically disabled when the seat belt is information in the U.S., call the U.S. Govern- unlocked and the belt is fully retracted. Volvo has some very specific ment's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-800-424-9393. recommendations: In Canada, visit Transport Canada's Child • Always wear your seat belt. Safety website at http://www.tc.gc.ca/ roadsafety/childsafety/menu.htm. • Airbags are a SUPPLEMENTAL safety device which, when used with a three- point seat belt can help reduce serious injuries during certain types of accidents.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 40 01 Safety

Child restraint systems 01

Child restraints G026518 G026513

Convertible seat Booster cushion

G008170 Infant seat WARNING WARNING There are three main types of child restraint A child seat should never be used in the Always refer to the child restraint manufac- systems: infant seats, convertible seats, and front passenger seat of any vehicle with a turer's instructions for detailed information booster cushions. They are classified accord- front passenger airbag – not even if the on securing the restraint. ing to the child's age and size. Passenger airbag off symbol near the rearview mirror is illuminated (on vehicles equip- The following section provides general infor- ped with Occupant Weight Sensor). If the mation on securing a child restraint using a severity of an accident were to cause the three-point seat belt. Refer to page 48 for airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious information on securing a child restraint using injury or death to a child seated in this posi- ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors. tion.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 41 01 Safety

01 Child restraint systems

WARNING • When not in use, keep the child restraint system secured or remove it from the passenger compartment to help prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop or collision. • A small child's head represents a con- siderable part of its total weight and its neck is still very weak. Volvo recommends that children up to age 4 travel, properly restrained, facing rearward. In addition, Volvo recommends that children should ride rearward facing, properly restrained, as long as possible. • The following text is mandated by Canadian legislation: The Volvo C70 is not equipped with top tether anchors. Child restraints or booster cushions requiring anchors of this kind cannot be properly fastened and should not be used in this vehicle.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 42 01 Safety

Infant seats 01

Securing an infant seat with a seat belt WARNING • An infant seat must be in the rear-facing position only. • The infant seat should not be positioned behind the driver's seat unless there is adequate space for safe installation.

1. Place the infant seat in the rear seat of the vehicle. G026523

G026417 Fasten the seat belt Do not place the infant seat in the front passenger's seat WARNING A child seat should never be used in the NOTE front passenger seat of any vehicle with a Refer to page 48 for information on secur- front passenger airbag – not even if the ing a child restraint using ISOFIX/LATCH "Passenger airbag off" symbol near the lower anchors. rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehicles equipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). If the severity of an accident were to cause the G026526 airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious Positioning the seat belt through the infant seat injury or death to a child seated in this position. 2. Attach the seat belt to the infant seat according to the manufacturer's instructions. 3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct click is audible.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 43 01 Safety

01 Infant seats

and is normal. The seat belt should now be locked in place. G026512

Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt 4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt out as far as possible to activate the belt's Ensure that the seat is securely in place automatic locking function. WARNING NOTE It should not be possible to move the child The locking retractor will automatically restraint (child seat) more than 1 in. (2.5 cm) release when the seat belt is unbuckled and in any direction along the seat belt path. allowed to retract fully. 6. Push and pull the infant seat along the seat 5. Press the infant seat firmly in place, let the belt path to ensure that it is held securely seat belt retract and pull it taut. A sound in place by the seat belt. from the seat belt retractor's automatic 7. The infant seat can be removed by unbuck- locking function will be audible at this time ling the seat belt and letting it retract completely.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 44 01 Safety

Convertible seats 01

Securing a convertible seat with a seat WARNING WARNING belt Always use a convertible seat that is suita- A small child's head represents a consider- ble for the child's age and size. See the con- able part of its total weight and its neck is vertible seat manufacturer's recommenda- still very weak. Volvo recommends that chil- tions. dren up to age 4 travel, properly restrained, facing rearward. In addition, Volvo recommends that children should ride rearward facing, properly restrained, as long as possible.

WARNING • Convertible child seats should be installed in the rear seat only. • A rear-facing convertible seat should not

G026420 be positioned behind the driver's seat unless there is adequate space for safe Do not place the convertible seat in the front pas- installation. senger's seat

NOTE G026518 1. Place the convertible seat in the rear seat of the vehicle. Refer to page 48 for information on secur- Route the seat belt through the convertible seat ing a child restraint using ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors.

Convertible seats can be used in either a forward or rearward-facing position, depending on the age and size of the child.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 45 01 Safety

01 Convertible seats

NOTE WARNING The locking retractor will automatically It should not be possible to move the child release when the seat belt is unbuckled and restraint (child seat) more than 1 in. (2.5 cm) allowed to retract fully. in any direction along the seat belt path.

5. Press the convertible seat firmly in place, The convertible seat can be removed by let the seat belt retract and pull it taut. A unbuckling the seat belt and letting it retract sound from the seat belt retractor's auto- completely. matic locking function will be audible at this time and is normal. The seat belt should now be locked in place. G026514

Fasten the seat belt 2. Attach the seat belt to the convertible seat according to the manufacturer's instructions. 3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct click is audible. 4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt out as far as possible to activate the belt's Ensure that the seat is securely in place automatic locking function. G026537

Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt 6. Push and pull the convertible seat along the seat belt path to ensure that it is held securely in place by the seat belt.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 46 01 Safety

Booster cushions 01

Securing a booster cushion Booster cushions are recommended for children who have outgrown convertible seats. 1. Place the booster cushion in the rear seat of the vehicle. 2. With the child properly seated on the booster cushion, attach the seat belt to or around the cushion according to the manufacturer's instructions. 3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct click is audible. 4. Ensure that the seat belt is pulled taut and fits snugly around the child. G026517

Position the child correctly on the booster cushion WARNING and fasten the seat belt • The hip section of the three-point seat WARNING belt must fit snugly across the child's hips, not across the stomach. A child seat should never be used in the front passenger seat of any vehicle with a • The shoulder section of the three-point front passenger airbag – not even if the seat belt should be positioned across Passenger airbag off symbol near the rear- the chest and shoulder. view mirror is illuminated (on vehicles equip- • The shoulder belt must never be placed ped with Occupant Weight Sensor). If the behind the child's back or under the severity of an accident were to cause the arm. airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious injury or death to a child seated in this position.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 47 01 Safety

01 ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors

Using the ISOFIX/LATCH lower child To access the anchors: seat anchors 1. Put the child restraint in position. 2. Kneel on the child restraint to press down the seat cushion and locate the anchors by feel. 3. Fasten the attachment on the child restraint's lower straps to the ISOFIX/ LATCH lower anchors. 4. Firmly tension the lower child seat straps according to the manufacturer's instructions. G031682 NOTE Fasten the attachment correctly to the ISOFIX/

G020798 • Always follow your child seat manufac- LATCH lower anchors turer's installation instructions and use Lower anchors for ISOFIX/LATCH-equipped ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors when- WARNING child seats are located in both rear seating ever possible. Be sure to fasten the attachment correctly positions, hidden below the backrest cushions. to the anchor (see the illustration). If the Symbols on the seat back upholstery mark the WARNING attachment is not correctly fastened, the anchor positions (see the illustration). child restraint may not be properly secured Volvo's ISOFIX/LATCH anchors conform to in the event of a collision. FMVSS/CMVSS standards. Always refer to WARNING the child restraint system's manual for The center of the rear seat is not a seating weight and size ratings. position. This area is not equipped with a seat belt or ISOFIX/LATCH anchors. No one should attempt to sit in this position and child seats should never be placed in the center of the rear seat.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 48 01 Safety

Information Provided by:Provided Information 49 Instrument overview...... 52 Instrument panel...... 54 Indicator and warning symbols...... 56 Symbols – instrument panel...... 58 Information display...... 61 12-volt sockets...... 63 Lighting panel...... 64 Left-side steering wheel lever...... 68 Trip computer...... 70 Cruise control*...... 72 Right-side steering wheel lever...... 74 Steering wheel adjustment, Hazard warning flashers...... 76 Power windows...... 77 Mirrors...... 78 Personal settings...... 81 HomeLink® Wireless Control System*...... 83

Information Provided by:Provided Information

50 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Information Provided by:Provided Information 02 Instruments and controls

Instrument overview

20 02 18 22 17 21 16 19

10 11 12 13 14 15 8 26 8 23 24 25 9 8 9 8 7 7 27 6 28 5 29 4 3 3 31 2 30

1 32

34 G028206

Information Provided by:Provided Information 52 02 Instruments and controls

Instrument overview

Steering wheel adjustment Seat belt reminder and Occupant Parking brake Weight Sensor indicator 02 Hood opener Position for optional equipment Driver's side reading light Controls in front doors Position for optional equipment Movement detector*, alarm sensor Left steering wheel lever Courtesy lighting switch Control panel in driver's door Lighting panel, fuel filler door opener Position for accessory switch Door open handle and locking button Passenger's side reading light Lock indicator light Display for climate control, personal Climate system air vent settings, and audio system

Side window air vent Controls for personal settings and audio system Cruise control Controls for climate system Horn, airbag Hazard warning flashers Main instrument panel Door open handle and locking button Audio controls Glove compartment Power windows Right steering wheel lever Gear selector Door mirror button, driver's side Ignition switch 12-volt socket Door mirror adjustment control Rear-view mirror Switch for raising/lowering the power Door mirror button, passenger's side retractable hard top

Information Provided by:Provided Information

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 53 02 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel

Speedometer the temperature readings may be slightly sively high engines speeds. This will be higher than the actual ambient tempera- noticeable as a pronounced unevenness in Turn signal, left ture. engine speed. Warning symbol – See the following pages Information symbol – See the following Indicator and information symbols for additional information. pages for additional information. Fuel gauge, see page 275 for fuel tank vol- Information display – The display presents Turn signal, right ume. When a warning light in the gauge information and warning messages, the Tachometer – Shows engine speed in comes on, the vehicle should be refueled ambient temperature, clock, etc. When the as soon as possible, see page 70 for ambient temperature is between 23 °F and thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm). Do not drive continuously with the needle more information on fuel level and con- 36 °F (–5 °C and +2 °C), a snowflake sym- sumption in the "Trip computer” section. bol is shown in the display. This symbol in the red area of the dial, which indicates serves as a warning for possible slippery maximum allowable engine rpm range. High beam indicator road surfaces. Please note that this symbol Instead, shift to a higher gear or slow the vehicle down. The engine management Function display – This window displays does not indicate a fault with your car. At information on functions such as the low speeds, or when the car is not moving, system will automatically prevent exces-

Information Provided by:Provided Information 54 02 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel odometer, trip odometers, optional rain sensor, and cruise control. 02 Trip odometer reset button – The trip odometers are used to measure short distances. Press the button briefly to switch between the odometer for the car's total mileage and the two trip odometers, T1 and T2. A long press (more than 2 seconds) resets the currently selected trip odometer. Temperature gauge – The gauge indicates the temperature of the engine cooling system. If the temperature is abnormally high and the needle enters the red zone, a message is shown in the display. Bear in mind that auxiliary lamps in front of the air intake reduce the cooling capacity at high outside temperatures and high engine loads. Indicator and warning symbols

Information Provided by:Provided Information 55 02 Instruments and controls

Indicator and warning symbols

Function check Symbols in the center of the instrument If the red warning symbol lights up: The indicator and warning symbols1 light up panel 02 1. Stop the car as soon as possible in a suit- when you turn the ignition key or the optional able location. keyless drive start control to the driving posi- 2. Read the message in the information dis- tion (position II) before starting. This shows that play. the symbols are functioning. 3. Follow the instructions provided, or con- When the engine starts, all sym- tact a trained and qualified Volvo service bols go out. If the engine is not technician. Erase the message by pressing started within 5 seconds, all of the , see page 61. symbols except the malfunction READ indicator light (CHECK ENGINE) Information symbol and the oil pressure warning light The yellow information symbol will go out. Certain symbols may lights up to alert the driver to a not have their functions illustrated, depending message in the information dis- on the car's equipment. play. This symbol illuminates when The PARK BRAKE symbol will not go out until the vehicle is traveling at speeds below 5 mph (7 km/h). the parking brake has been released. Warning symbol The red warning symbol lights up The message can be erased by pressing the to indicate a fault that could affect READ button, see page 61, or will disappear the car's drivability.This symbol automatically (the length of time required for illuminates when the vehicle is the message to disappear varies, depending traveling at speeds above 5 mph on the function indicated). (7 km/h). A text explaining the nature of the fault When the message "TIME FOR REGULAR will also be shown in the information display. MAINTENANCE" is displayed, the text can be The symbol and accompanying text will remain erased and the information symbol light can be on until the fault has been corrected. This sym- turned off by pressing the READ button. The bol may also light up in combination with other text will disappear and the symbol light will go indicator or warning symbols. out automatically after two minutes.

1 On certain engines, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Instead, a text warning is provided in the information display, see page 219.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 56 02 Instruments and controls

Indicator and warning symbols

This symbol may also light up in combination with other indicator or warning symbols. 02 NOTE The car can still be driven after the information symbol has come on. The car can be driven for 1–2 weeks after service-related information has been displayed.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 57 02 Instruments and controls

Symbols – instrument panel

Symbols – left side A CHECK ENGINE light may have many cau- 3. Rear fog light ses. Sometimes, you may not notice a change This symbol indicates that the rear 02 in your car's behavior. Even so, an uncorrected fog light (located in the driver's condition could hurt fuel economy, emission side taillight cluster) is on. controls, and drivability. Extended driving without correcting the cause could even damage other components in your car. 4. Stability system DSTC This indicator symbol flashes when NOTE the DSTC (Dynamic Stability and Canadian models are equipped with the Traction control system) is actively second symbol. working to stabilize the car, see page 158 for more detailed information. 2. Anti-lock Brake system (ABS)

G026439 If the warning light comes on, there 5. Tire Pressure Monitoring System is a malfunction of the ABS system This system monitors inflation (the standard braking system will pressure in the tires. See page 1. Malfunction indicator light still function). 201 for more information. The vehicle should be driven to a trained and qualified Volvo service As you drive, a computer called technician for inspection, see 6. Fuel level warning light On-Board Diagnostics II (OBDII) page 154 for additional informa- When this light comes on, the vehi- monitors your car's engine, trans- tion. cle should be refueled as soon as mission, electrical and emission possible. systems. NOTE The CHECK ENGINE light will light up if the Canadian models are equipped with the computer senses a condition that potentially second symbol. may need correcting. When this happens, please have your car checked by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician as soon as possible.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 58 02 Instruments and controls

Symbols – instrument panel

Symbols – right side 2. Parking brake applied 4. Oil pressure warning light1 This light is on when the parking If the light comes on while driving, brake (hand brake) is applied. The the car, stop the engine immedi- 02 parking brake lever is situated ately, and check the engine oil between the front seats, see level. If the oil level is normal and page 157 for more information. the light stays on after restart, have the car towed to the nearest trained and qualified Volvo service technician. After hard driving, the light may come on occasionally when the engine is idling. This is normal, provided it goes off when the engine speed is increased. NOTE 5. Seat belt reminder Canadian models are equipped with the second symbol. This symbol (and the seat belt

G026438 reminder light above the rear view mirror) will light up if either front 3. SRS system warning light seat occupant has not buckled his/ 1. Turn signal indicator for trailer (certain If this light comes on while the car her seat belt. If the car is not mov- markets only) is being driven, or remains on for ing, the symbols will go out after approximately If you are towing a trailer, this light longer than approximately 10 sec- 6 seconds. will flash simultaneously with the onds after the car has been turn signals on the trailer. If the started, the SRS system's diag- 6. Generator warning light light does not flash when signaling, nostic functions have detected a fault in a seat If the light comes on while the one of the turn signals on the trailer belt lock or pretensioner, a front airbag, side engine is running, have the charg- or on the car are not functioning properly. impact airbag, and/or an inflatable curtain. ing system checked by an author- Have the system(s) inspected by a trained and ized Volvo workshop. qualified Volvo service technician as soon as possible.

1 On certain engines, this symbol is not used to indicate low oil pressure. Instead, a text warning is provided in the information display, see also page 219. Information Provided by:Provided Information 59 02 Instruments and controls

Symbols – instrument panel

7. Brake failure warning light 2. Restart the engine. If this light comes on while driving 02 3. If both warning lights go off, no further or braking, stop the car as quickly action is required and the car can be as possible in a safe place, open driven. the hood, and check the brake fluid level in the reservoir, see 4. If both lights remain on after the engine has page 218 for the location of the been restarted, switch off the engine again reservoir. and check the brake fluid level, see page 218 for the location of the reservoir.

Door open warning NOTE The driver will be alerted if one of the doors, the Canadian models are equipped with the hood or the trunk are open or ajar. second symbol. At low speeds If the car is moving at a speed of WARNING less than approximately 3 mph If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in the (5 km/h), the Information symbol in reservoir or if a BRAKE FAILURE STOP the instrument panel will light up SAFELY message is displayed in the infor- and a message will be shown in the mation display: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the information display indicating which door(s), car towed to a trained and qualified Volvo etc is not completely closed. service technician and have the brake system inspected. At higher speeds If the car is moving at a speed If the BRAKES and ABS warning lights come above approximately 6 mph on at the same time, this could indicate a fault (10 km/h), the Warning symbol in in the brake system. the instrument panel will light up and a message will be shown in the In this case: information display indicating which door(s), 1. Stop the car in a suitable place and switch etc is not completely closed. off the engine.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 60 02 Instruments and controls

Information display

Messages NOTE Message Meaning If a message is displayed when e.g. you are .....SERVICE Take your car to a 02 using the trip computer, this message must A be read before you can access the trip com- REQUIRED trained and qualified puter. Volvo service technician for inspection as soon as possible (but Message Meaning preferably before the next scheduled mainte- .....STOP Stop the vehicle in a nance service). SAFELYA safe place and switch off the engine to help BOOK TIME Book time for service at prevent the risk of seri- FOR MAINTE- an authorized Volvo ous damage. NANCE workshop.

G019617 HIGH ENGINE Stop the vehicle in a TIME FOR This message is affec- TEMP STOP safe place and switch REGULAR ted by the number of When an indicator or warning light in the instru- SAFELY off the engine to help MAINTE- miles/km driven, by the ment panel comes on, a message is also prevent the risk of seri- NANCE number of months, or shown in the information display. To read a ous damage. by the number of engine message: hours since the service ...... SERVICE Take your car to a reminder was reset at 1. Press the READ button (1). A URGENT trained and qualified the most recent regu- 2. Pressing READ repeatedly enables you to Volvo service techni- larly scheduled service. scroll to any other messages that may be cian for inspection stored. immediately. MAINTE- If the vehicle is not serv- NANCE OVER- iced according to ...... SEE MAN- Refer to your owner's schedule, the warranty A DUE UAL manual. For additional may not apply to dam- information, please aged parts, etc. contact your Volvo retailer.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 61 02 Instruments and controls

Information display

Message Meaning 02 TIME FOR This message is affec- REGULAR ted by the number of MAINTE- miles/km driven, by the NANCE number of months, or by the number of engine hours since the service reminder was reset at the most recent regularly scheduled service.

REMINDER Stop as soon as possi- CHECK OIL ble and switch off the LEVEL engine, check the oil level and top up if necessary, see page 219.

A This is part of the message. Additional information will also be displayed.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 62 02 Instruments and controls

12-volt sockets

12-volt socket (front seat) NOTE The cover should be kept on when the aux- 02 iliary socket is not in use. G026349

12-volt socket, auxiliary equipment The 12-volt socket can be used to plug in certain accessories such as cellular telephones, etc. The key must be in position I (or higher) for the auxiliary socket to function. The maximum current consumption is 10A (120W).

Ashtrays/cigarette lighter The auxiliary socket can also be used to power a cigarette lighter. Accessory cigarette lighters and ashtrays can be purchased from your Volvo retailer.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 63 02 Instruments and controls

Lighting panel

Overview Pos. Lighting NOTE 02 Daytime running lights (low See page 68 for information on switching between high and low beams. beam headlights) on. Pull the left-side steering wheel lever to flash the high beam headlights. Active Bending Lights (ABL)* Parking lights (the daytime running lights do not function with the switch in this positionA)

Daytime running lights (low beam headlights) on. Pull the left-side steering wheel lever to toggle between high and low G026415 beams.

Light switch Active Bending Lights (ABL)* Thumb wheel for adjusting brightness of instrument lighting A On Canadian models, the daytime running lights will remain on with the light switch in this position. Front fog lights G026507 Headlights Lighting panel, vehicles with Active Bending head- To unlock the fuel filler door lights 1. Turn the ignition key to position II. Rear fog light When this function is activated, the headlight 2. The daytime running lights (low beam beams adjust laterally to help light up a curve headlights) illuminate automatically, according to movements of the steering wheel. except when the light switch (1) is in the This function can be activated by turning the parking light position ( )A. lighting switch to the Active Bending Light position (indicated by the arrow in the illustration). The indicator light in the Active

Information Provided by:Provided Information

64 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 02 Instruments and controls

Lighting panel

Bending Light symbol will illuminate. The func- Daytime running lights (DRL)* ambient light (and will switch back to DRL tion can be deactivated by turning the lighting To help conserve fuel by reducing the use of when the ambient light becomes brighter). 02 switch counterclockwise to one of the other electrical current in the vehicle, DRL can be lighting positions. used in daylight conditions instead of the low NOTE beam headlights, which consume more elec- To conserve as much electrical current as trical current. The daytime running lights are possible, the taillights will also be turned off mounted in the front spoiler and use bright, when the light sensor switches from the low electricity-saving LEDs (light emitting diodes). beam headlights to DRL.

WARNING • DRL is a driving aid designed to help conserve electrical current. This system cannot always determine if the ambient lighting conditions are sufficient for switching from low beams to DRL (or vice versa). It is always the driver's

G020789 responsibility to visually determine if the low beam headlights should be used. Headlight pattern with ABL deactivated (left) and Move the light switch to the posi- activated (right) tion to turn on the low beams. NOTE • As the driver, you have full responsibility for operating the vehicle in a safe man- A • This function can only be activated in Position activates automatic DRL in daylight ner. twilight or dark conditions, and only driving conditions when the vehicle is in motion. Putting the light switch in position A activates • If the indicator light flashes, this indi- automatic daytime running lights in daylight cates a fault in the ABL system. A text driving conditions. This is controlled by a light message will also be displayed. sensor, which monitors the ambient lighting conditions and automatically switches from DRL to the low beam headlights in weaker

Information Provided by:Provided Information

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 65 02 Instruments and controls

Lighting panel

Parking lights The rear fogs light will only function in combi- NOTE The front and rear parking lights can be turned nation with the high/low beam headlights or the 02 optional front fog lights. To make it easier to read the odometer, trip on even when the ignition is switched off. odometer, clock, and ambient temperature, Turn the light switch (1) to the parking light 1. Turn the ignition key to position II. these gauges illuminate when the vehicle is position. unlocked and when the key has been 2. Press button (5) to turn on the rear fog removed from the ignition switch. The light- The license plate lights also illuminate when the lights. ing will go out when the vehicle is locked. parking lights are switched on. An indicator light in the button illuminates when the rear fog lights are on. Move the thumb wheel (2) up to increase Brake lights brightness or down to decrease brightness. The brake lights come on automatically when NOTE the brakes are applied. The rear fog lights are considerably brighter Unlocking the fuel filler door than the normal taillights and should be With the ignition switched off, press button (4) used only when conditions such as fog, rain, to unlock the fuel filler door. Please note that Fog lights snow, smoke or dust reduce visibility for the fuel filler door will remain unlocked until the Front fog lights* other vehicles to less than 500 ft. (150 meters). car begins to move forward. The front fog lights can be used in combination with either the headlights or the parking lights. An audible click will be heard when the fuel filler door re-locks. 1. Turn the ignition key to position II. Instrument panel lighting 2. Press button (3) to turn on the front fog The instrument panel lighting illuminates when lights. the ignition is in position II and the light switch (1) is in either position or . An indicator light in the button illuminates when the front fog lights are on.

Rear fog lights The rear fog lights are located in both taillight clusters.

Information Provided by:Provided Information

66 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 02 Instruments and controls

Lighting panel

Manually unlocking the fuel filler door

02 G020951

If it should be necessary to manually unlock the fuel filler door from the trunk, the power retractable hard top should be up. 1. Remove the panel covering the taillight housing on the right side of the trunk. 2. Gently pull the cord that is attached to a hook to pop open the fuel filler door. When the fuel filler door has opened, return the cord to the hook and replace the taillight cover panel.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 67 02 Instruments and controls

Left-side steering wheel lever

Lever positions Turn signals High/low beam headlights

02 When turning Continuous high beams Move the lever as far up or down as pos- See page 64 for an illustration of the lighting sible (to position 2) to start the turn signals. panel. The turn signals will be cancelled automatically 1. Turn the ignition key to position II. by the movement of the steering wheel, or the 2. lever can be returned to its initial position by With the light switch in position , see hand. page 64, pull the turn signal lever toward the steering wheel (position 4) to toggle When changing lanes between high and low beams. The driver can automatically flash the turn signals 3 times by: High beam flash See page 64 for an illustration of the lighting • Moving the turn signal lever up or down to panel. G026954 position 1 and releasing it. 1. Turn the ignition key to position II. Turn signals, lane change position • Moving the lever up or down to position 2 and immediately back to its original posi- 2. With the light switch in position pull Turn signals, position for normal turns tion. the turn signal lever to position 3 or 4. The High beam flash high beams will flash for approximately NOTE 1 second. Toggle between high and low beams, • This automatic flashing sequence can Home Safe lighting be interrupted by immediately moving With the light switch in position , pull the lever in the opposite direction. the turn signal lever to position 3. The high beams will remain on until the lever is If the turn signal indicator flashes faster • released. than normal, check for a burned-out turn signal bulb. Home safe lighting When you leave your car at night, you can make use of the home safe lighting function to illuminate the area in front of the car.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 68 02 Instruments and controls

Left-side steering wheel lever

1. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

2. Pull the direction indicator lever as far as 02 possible towards the steering wheel (to position 4) and release it. 3. Exit the car and lock the doors. The headlights and parking lights will illuminate and remain on for 301, 60 or 90 seconds. The time interval can be changed according to your preferences by using the Personal Settings function, see page 81 for more information.

1 Factory setting.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 69 02 Instruments and controls

Trip computer

• --- MPH ACTUAL SPEED (current speed 2. Press RESET (3). in mph, Canadian models only) 02 --- MILES TO EMPTY TANK • DSTC-related information, see page 158 This function shows the approximate distance that can be driven on the fuel remaining in the NOTE tank. The calculation is based on average fuel Warning messages from the car's monitor- consumption during the last 20 miles (30 km) ing systems will override the trip computer of driving and the amount of fuel remaining in function. the tank when the reading was taken. When the message --- MILES TO EMPTY If a warning message is shown in the informa- TANK appears in the display, refuel as soon tion display while you are using the trip com- as possible. puter: MPG AVERAGE G029052 1. Acknowledge the message by pressing the This value indicates fuel consumption since the (button 1). READ (press to acknowledge/confirm/ READ last time the trip computer was reset, by press- erase a message) 2. Press READ again to return to the trip ing RESET (button 3). When the engine is computer function. switched off, information on fuel consumption Thumb wheel (used to scroll among the trip is stored and remains in system memory until computer menus) RESET (button 3) is pressed again. RESET Controls The trip computer functions can be accessed MPG INSTANTANEOUS The trip computer stores information gathered by twisting the thumb wheel (2) one step at a This value indicates the current fuel consump- from several systems in your car and has four time in either direction. Twisting a final time tion, based on readings taken once per sec- menus (five on Canadian models) that can be returns you to the original function. ond. When the car is not moving, "----" will be shown in the information display. displayed. • --- MILES TO EMPTY TANK Resetting MPH AVERAGE SPEED --.- MPG AVERAGE (average fuel consump- • --.- MPG AVERAGE (average fuel con- This value indicates average speed since the sumption) tion) and --- MPH AVERAGE SPEED can be last time the trip computer was reset, by press- reset. • --.- MPG INSTANTANEOUS (current fuel ing RESET (button 3). When the engine is consumption) 1. Select one of these functions. switched off, information on average speed is • --- MPH AVERAGE SPEED

Information Provided by:Provided Information 70 02 Instruments and controls

Trip computer stored and remains in system memory until the RESET (button 3) is pressed again. 02 MPH ACTUAL SPEED (Canadian models only) This function provides the driver with an instantaneous conversion of the car's current speed from km/h to mph.

NOTE Trip computer readings may vary slightly depending on the circumference of the tires on the car, tire inflation, or driving style.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 71 02 Instruments and controls

Cruise control*

Engaging the cruise control function Increasing or decreasing speed NOTE 02 • Cruise control will not function at speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h). • Momentary acceleration, for less than 1 minute (e.g. when passing another car), does not affect cruise control operation. The car will automatically return to the previously set speed when the accelerator pedal is released.

Temporarily disengaging the cruise control

G020141 G031667 • Press 0 to temporarily disengage cruise control. The cruise control buttons are located on the Use + or – in the following ways to increase or CRUISEwill appear in the function display. The left side of the steering wheel hub. decrease the vehicle's speed: currently set speed is stored in the system's memory. 1. Press and hold down + or – until the vehicle NOTE reaches the desired speed. This will This does not set the vehicle's speed. become the set speed when the button is Cruise control is also automatically released. disengaged: If the speed drops below approximately 1. Press the CRUISE button. CRUISE will 2. Press + or – for approximately a half sec- • 20 mph (30 km/h) when driving uphill. appear in the function display in the center ond and release the button to increase or of the instrument panel. decrease vehicle speed by approximately • When the brake or clutch pedal is 1 mph (1.6 km/h). depressed. 2. Press + or – to set the current speed. If the gear selector is moved to posi- CRUISE-ONwill be displayed. • tion N.

Information Provided by:Provided Information

72 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 02 Instruments and controls

Cruise control*

• During wheel spin or wheel lock-up. If the vehicle's speed is increased by using • 02 the accelerator pedal for more than 1 minute.

Returning to the set speed Press the button to resume the previously set speed. CRUISE- ON will be displayed.

Disengaging cruise control Cruise control can also be disengaged by: • Pressing the CRUISE button (CRUISE- ON will no longer be shown in the function display). • Putting the gear selector in Neutral (N).

WARNING Cruise control should not be used in heavy traffic or when driving on wet or slippery roads. Cruise control may not maintain the set speed on steep downgrades.

Information Provided by:Provided Information

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 73 02 Instruments and controls

Right-side steering wheel lever

Windshield wipers Manual wiper function CAUTION From position 0, move the lever 02 upward. The windshield wipers will • Use ample washer fluid when washing sweep one stroke at a time for as the windshield. The windshield should be thoroughly wet when the wipers are long as the lever is held up. in operation. Intermittent wiper function • Before using the wipers, ice and snow With the lever in this position, you should be removed from the windshield/rear window. Be sure the wiper can set the wiper interval by mov- blades are not frozen in place. ing the thumb wheel (C) upward to increase wiper speed or downward to decrease the speed. Headlight washers (certain models) Continuous wiper function When the lever has been pulled, high pressure The wipers operate at "normal" jets mounted in the bumper will spray the head- speed. lights. Windshield/headlight washers High speed wiper function. The following applies to conserve washer fluid, Rain sensor – on/of, see page 74 see page 64 for information on the light switch positions: Thumb wheel – Windshield washers Low/high beam headlights on Windshield wipers off Pull the lever toward the steering wheel and The headlights will be washed the first time the The windshield wipers are off when release it. The wipers will make 2–3 sweeps windshield is washed. Thereafter, the head- the lever is in position 0. across the windshield after the lever has been lights will only be washed once for every five released. times the windshield is washed within a 10 minute period.

Parking lights on The optional Active Bending Lights will be washed once for every five times the windshield is washed. Normal halogen headlights will not be washed.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 74 02 Instruments and controls

Right-side steering wheel lever

– Rain sensor* 3. Press button B (see page 74). The rain sen- – Thumb wheel sor symbol will appear in the lower display. The thumb wheel is used to set the wiper inter- 02 Manual deactivation val when intermittent wiping is selected, or the sensitivity to the amount of rain on the wind- The rain sensor can be deactivated by: shield when the rain sensor is selected. Move Pressing button (B). the wheel upward or downward to increase/ or decrease wiper speed when the intermittent function is selected, or to increase/decrease Moving the windshield wiper lever down. the optional rain sensor's sensitivity when the this function is activated. NOTE The rain sensor function will remain activated if the lever is briefly moved up to activate the "manual sweep" function. G031469

The rain sensor regulates windshield wiper CAUTION speed according to the amount of water on the The rain sensor should be deactivated when windshield. The sensitivity of the rain sensor is washing the car in an automatic car wash, adjusted by moving the thumb wheel (C in the etc. If the rain sensor function is left on, the illustration on the previous page) up (the wipers wipers will start inadvertently in the car will sweep the windshield more frequently) or wash and could be damaged. down (the wipers will sweep the windshield less frequently). Automatic deactivation The rain sensor is deactivated automatically in On/Off the following situations: Activating the rain sensor • When the key is removed from the ignition. 1. Switch on the ignition. • Five minutes after the ignition is switched 2. Put the windshield wiper lever in posi- off if the key is left in the ignition. tion 0.

Information Provided by:Provided Information

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 75 02 Instruments and controls

Steering wheel adjustment, Hazard warning flashers

Steering wheel adjustment Check that the steering wheel is locked in the 2. Press the button again to turn off the flash- new position. ers. 02 WARNING NOTE Never adjust the steering wheel while driv- • Regulations regarding the use of the ing. hazard warning flasher may vary, depending on where you live. • The hazard warning flashers will be acti- Hazard warning flashers vated automatically if an airbag deploys. G027308

Both the height and the reach of the steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position for the driver. 1. Pull down the lever on the steering column to release the steering wheel. 2. Adjust the steering wheel to a suitable G020144 position. 3. Press the lever back into place to lock the The four-way flasher should be used to indi- steering wheel in the new position. If nec- cate that the vehicle has become a traffic haz- essary, press the steering wheel slightly ard. while pressing the lever into the locked 1. Press the triangular button in the center position. dash.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 76 02 Instruments and controls

Power windows

Operation Opening a window to close a window to the position of your Lightly press down the front edge of any of the choice. 02 buttons (A or B) to the first detent ("stop") to 2. Pull up the front part of one or both buttons open a window to the position of your choice. (A) as far as possible and release to automatically close the front window(s) com- WARNING pletely. • Always remove the ignition key when the vehicle is unattended. Power window control – front • Never leave children unattended in the passenger's side vehicle. • Make sure that the windows are completely unobstructed before they are operated.

Control panel in driver's door 1. Press down the front part of one or both buttons A as far as possible and release to Open/close front windows automatically open the front window(s) Open/close rear windows completely. The power windows are controlled by buttons 2. To stop the window at any time, pull the in the arm rests. button up. • The ignition must be ON (ignition key in position I, II or the engine running) for the NOTE power windows to function. To reduce buffeting wind noise if the rear windows are opened, also open the front The control for the power window in the front • The power windows will also function after passenger's door operates that window only. the ignition has been switched off as long windows slightly. as neither of the front doors has been opened. Closing a window 1. Lightly pull up the front edge of any of the buttons (A or B) to the first detent ("stop")

Information Provided by:Provided Information 77 02 Instruments and controls

Mirrors

Rearview mirror Rearview mirror with compass* Calibrating the compass

02 G020992 G020991

G008130 The upper right-hand corner of the rearview The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones. Auto-dim function mirror has an integrated display that shows the The compass is initially set for the zone to An integrated sensor reacts to headlights from compass direction toward which the car is which the car was delivered, and should following traffic and automatically reduces pointing. Eight different directions can be dis- always be adjusted if the car is driven to a new glare. played: N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W and NW. The magnetic zone. A "C" will be displayed if cali- display shows your car's orientation with bration becomes necessary. respect to true north. To calibrate the compass: 1. Stop the car in a large, open area, away from traffic. 2. Using a pen or similar object, hold the button (1) depressed for at least 6 seconds. "C" will be displayed.

Information Provided by:Provided Information

78 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 02 Instruments and controls

Mirrors

Power door mirrors Use this control to adjust the driver's door mirror. 02 Passenger's door mirror: 1. Press the R switch (a light in the switch will go on) to activate the adjustment control. Use this control to adjust the passenger's door mirror. 2. After you have adjusted the mirror(s), press the L or R switch again (the LED will go out) to deactivate the adjustment control.

Storing the mirrors' position

G026409 The position of the door mirrors is stored when the vehicle is locked. The next time the driver's Magnetic zones door is unlocked with the same remote key and 3. Press button (1) for at least 3 seconds to The mirror control switches are located on the that door is opened within 2 minutes, the driver's door armrest. display the number of the current magnetic optional power driver's seat and side door mir- zone. rors will automatically move to the position that 4. Press button (1) repeatedly until the num- Adjusting the mirrors they were in when the doors were most ber for the required geographical area (1– recently locked with the same remote key. WARNING 15) is displayed. "C" will be displayed Folding power door mirrors* again. • The mirrors should always be adjusted The mirrors can be folded in for parking/driving 5. Drive slowly in a circle at a maximum speed prior to driving. in narrow spaces. of 6 mph (10 km/h) until a compass direc- • Objects seen in the passenger's side Folding the mirrors in tion is displayed. wide-angle door mirror are closer than they appear to be. 1. Press down the L and R mirror control but- Calibration is complete. tons on the driver's door at the same time.

Driver's door mirror: 2. Release them after approximately one sec- Press the L button (a light in the switch will ond. The mirrors automatically fold in to the go on) to activate the adjustment control. fully retracted position. Information Provided by:Provided Information

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 79 02 Instruments and controls

Mirrors

Folding the mirrors out 1. Fold in the mirrors by pressing the L and Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L R mirror control buttons on the driver's 02 and R buttons at the same time. The mirrors door at the same time. automatically fold out to the fully extended 2. Fold them out again by pressing the L and position. R mirror control buttons. Automatic folding This returns the mirrors to their original (neutral) When the vehicle is locked/unlocked with the positions. remote key or with the optional keyless drive system (see page 128), the power door mirrors Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)* with automatically fold in or out. The Blind Spot Information System (BLIS) is an information system that indicates the presence NOTE of another vehicle in the side-view mirror's The door mirrors will not fold out automati- "blind area." See page 168 for detailed infor- cally when the vehicle is unlocked if they mation. were folded in using the buttons on the driver's door control panel.

This function can be activated/deactivated in Personal settings (see page 81). In the menu system, go to Car settings… Mirror fold on locking. Return to "neutral" position If a mirror has been inadvertently moved (bum- ped in a parking lot, etc.) from its original (neutral) position, it must be moved back to this position before automatic folding will function again. To do so:

Information Provided by:Provided Information

80 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 02 Instruments and controls

Personal settings

Control panel Personal settings can be made for some of the 2. Select hour(s) or minute(s) to be changed car's functions, such as the central locking with the left/right arrow keys. system, climate control, and the audio system. 02 3. Press ENTER to start the clock. Please refer to page 246 for more information on the audio functions that can be adjusted. The settings are presented in the display (A). NOTE If you are currently using the 12-hour time To access the menu and adjust settings setting, use the up/down arrow keys to 1. Press MENU (B). select AM/PM after the minute-setting has been adjusted. 2. Scroll to Car settings… using the menu navigation control (E). Lock confirmation light 3. Press ENTER (D). When the car is locked/unlocked with the 4. Select an alternative using the menu navi- remote key, the direction indicators can be gation control (E). selected to flash to confirm the action. The alternatives On/Off are available for both lock- 5. Confirm your selection by pressing ing and unlocking. ENTER. Autolock To exit the menu When the car starts to move, the doors and Press EXIT (C). trunk can be locked automatically. The alternatives On/Off are available. Available settings Display NOTE Clock adjust Menu button To set the time: Pulling the handle twice on a door unlocks and opens that door. Exit button 1. Use the number keys or the up/down arrow Enter button keys on the navigation control (E) to change the hour or minute. Unlock Menu navigation controls There are two alternatives for unlocking:

Information Provided by:Provided Information 81 02 Instruments and controls

Personal settings

• Global (All doors) – unlocks all doors and Activate once and Ask on exit, see equipped with ECC. Choose between the trunk with one press on the remote key. page 136 for additional information. "Low", "Normal" and "High". 02 • Two Step (Two-stage unlocking) – This • Timer for recirculation – when the timer is alternative unlocks the driver's door with Approach lighting active, the air recirculates in the car for one press on the remote key. A second This alternative determines the length of time 3–12 minutes depending on the ambient press unlocks the passenger's door and for which the car's lights will remain on when temperature. Select On/Off depending on the trunk the Approach light button on the central lock- whether the recirculation timer is to be ing system's remote key is pressed. Intervals active or not. Automatically folding the door mirrors of 30/60/90 seconds may be selected, see the The setting makes it possible to automatically section "Remote key functions" for more infor- Keyless locking and unlocking* fold the door mirrors in or out when the vehicle mation. The following alternatives can be selected for is locked or unlocked. See page 79. locking and unlocking the doors and trunk: Home safe lighting Operating side windows This alternative determines the length of time • All doors – all doors are locked or unlocked at the same time. The following alternative can be selected for for which the car's lights will remain on when opening all side windows at the same time by the high beam lever on the steering column is • Doors on the same side – front and rear pressing and holding the Unlock button on the pulled toward the wheel with the ignition doors on the same side are unlocked central locking system’s remote key, (see switched off. Intervals of 30/60/90 seconds together. page 132 for additional information). may be selected, see page 68 for information • Both front doors – both front doors are unlocked together. • Auto open all windows On/Off on using this function. One front door – either of the front doors Information • Temporarily turning off the double can be unlocked separately1. VIN number – The VIN (Vehicle Identifica- locking function and alarm sensor(s) • tion Number) is the car's unique identity Reset to factory settings The double locking function and the alarm sen- number. sors can be temporarily turned off (if, for exam- Use this alternative to return to the default cli- ple, a person or a pet remains in the vehicle • Number of Keys – the number of keys reg- mate system settings. when the doors are locked from outside with istered for the car is displayed here. the remote key, and the power retractable hard Climate functions top is down. There are two alternatives: • Blower speed in AUTO mode – the blower speed can be set to AUTO mode in models

1 Factory default.

Information Provided by:Provided Information

82 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 02 Instruments and controls

HomeLink® Wireless Control System*

Introduction WARNING Programming HomeLink

• If you use HomeLink to open a garage NOTE 02 door or gate, be sure no one is near the gate or door while it is in motion. Some vehicles may require the ignition When programming a garage door switch to be turned on or to the second • (“accessories”) position for programming opener, it is advised to park outside of and/or operation of HomeLink. It is also rec- the garage. ommended that a new battery be placed in • Do not use HomeLink with any garage the hand-held transmitter of the device door opener that lacks safety stop and being programmed to HomeLink for quicker reverse features as required by U.S. training and accurate transmission of the federal safety standards (this includes radio-frequency signal. any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage 1. Position the end of your hand-held trans- door that cannot detect an object - sig- G030070 mitter 1–3 inches (5–14 cm) away from the naling the door to stop and reverse - HomeLink button you wish to program does not meet current U.S. federal The HomeLink1 Wireless Control System pro- while keeping the indicator light in view. safety standards. For more information, vides a convenient way to replace up to three contact HomeLink at: 2. Simultaneously press and hold both the hand-held radio-frequency (RF) transmitters www.homelink.com. chosen HomeLink and hand-held transmit- used to activate devices such as gate opera- ter buttons until the HomeLink indicator tors, garage door openers, entry door locks, light changes from a slow to a rapidly blink- Retain the original transmitter of the RF device security systems, even home lighting. Addi- ing light. Now you may release both the you are programming for use in other vehicles tional HomeLink information can be found on HomeLink and hand-held transmitter but- as well as for future HomeLink programming. It the Internet at www.homelink.com. tons. is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink buttons be erased for security purposes. Refer to “Erasing HomeLink Buttons”.

1 HomeLink and the HomeLink house are registered trademarks of Johnson Controls, Inc. Information Provided by:Provided Information

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 83 02 Instruments and controls

HomeLink® Wireless Control System*

NOTE found where the hanging antenna wire is cedures, replace “Programming HomeLink” attached to the motor-head unit. step 2 with the following: 02 Some devices may require you to replace this Programming Step 2 with procedures 5. Firmly press and release the “learn” or • Continue to press and hold the HomeLink noted in the “Gate Operator / Canadian Pro- “smart” button. (The name and color of the button while you press and release - gramming” section. If the HomeLink indica- button may vary by manufacturer.) There every two seconds (“cycle”) your hand- tor light does not change to a rapidly blink- are 30 seconds to initiate step 6. held transmitter until the HomeLink indica- ing light after performing these steps, con- tor light changes from a slow to a rapidly tact HomeLink at www.homelink.com. 6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold blinking light. Now you may release both for two seconds and release the pro- the HomeLink and hand-held transmitter grammed HomeLink button. Repeat the 3. Firmly press, hold for five seconds and buttons. “press/hold/release” sequence a second release the programmed HomeLink but- Proceed with “Programming” step 3 to com- time, and, depending on the brand of the ton up to two separate times to activate the plete. garage door opener (or other rolling code door. If the door does not activate, press equipped device), repeat this sequence a and hold the just-trained HomeLink button third time to complete the programming Using HomeLink and observe the indicator light. process. To operate, simply press and release the pro- • If the indicator light stays on con- HomeLink should now activate your rolling grammed HomeLink button. Activation will stantly, programming is complete code equipped device. now occur for the trained device (i.e., garage and your device should activate when door opener, gate operator, security system, the HomeLink button is pressed and Gate Operator/Canadian Programming entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). For released. Canadian radio-frequency laws require trans- convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the • If the indicator light blinks rapidly for mitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after sev- device may also be used at any time. In the two seconds and then turns to a con- eral seconds of transmission – which may not event that there are still programming difficul- stant light continue with “Program- be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the ties or questions, contact HomeLink at: ming” steps 4-6 to complete the pro- signal during programming. Similar to this www.homelink.com. gramming of a rolling code equipped Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are device (most commonly a garage door designed to “time-out” in the same manner. opener). If you live in Canada or you are having difficul- 4. At the garage door opener receiver (motor- ties programming a gate operator or garage head unit) in the garage, locate the “learn” door opener by using the “Programming” pro- or “smart” button. This can usually be

Information Provided by:Provided Information

84 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 02 Instruments and controls

HomeLink® Wireless Control System*

Erasing HomeLink Buttons For questions or comments, contact HomeLink To erase programming from the three Home- at: www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515. 02 Link buttons (individual buttons cannot be This device complies with FCC rules part 15 erased but can be “reprogrammed” as outlined and Industry Canada (IC) RSS-210. Operation below), follow the step noted: is subject to the following two conditions: (1) 1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink This device may not cause harmful interfer- buttons until the indicator light begins to ence, and (2) This device must accept any flash-after 10 seconds. interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired opera- 2. Release both buttons. Do not hold for tion. longer that 20 seconds. HomeLink is now in the train (or learning) mode NOTE and can be programmed at any time beginning The transmitter has been tested and com- with “Programming” - step 1. plies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Reprogramming a Single HomeLink the party responsible for compliance could Button void the user’s authority to operate the device.2 To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink button previously trained, follow these steps: 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. DO NOT release the button. 2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the Home- Link button, proceed with “Programming” - step 1.

2 The term “IC:” before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.

Information Provided by:Provided Information

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 85 General information...... 88 Air vents...... 90 Electronic Climate Control (ECC)...... 91 Air distribution...... 95

Information Provided by:Provided Information 86 CLIMATE

Information Provided by:Provided Information 03 Climate

General information

Air conditioning – A/C Fog on the inside of the windows Passenger compartment filter Your car is equipped with a climate control The defroster function should be used to Replace the cabin air filter with a new one at system that includes either manually adjusta- remove fog or mist from the inside of the win- the recommended intervals. Please refer to ble air conditioning or optional Electronic Cli- dows. Keeping the windows clean with a com- your Warranty and Service Records Informa- mate Control (ECC). mercially available window washing spray will tion booklet, or consult a trained and qualified also help prevent fogging or misting Volvo service technician for these intervals. The air conditioning system can be switched 03 The filter should be replaced more often when off, but for optimal air quality in the passenger driving under dirty and dusty conditions. The compartment and to prevent the windows from Climate control maintenance filter cannot be cleaned and therefore should fogging, the air conditioning should be left on Special tools and equipment are required to always be replaced with a new one. – even in cool weather. maintain and carry out repairs on the climate system. Work of this type should only be done NOTE NOTE by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. There are different types of cabin air filters. In warm weather, a small amount of water Ensure that the correct type is installed. may accumulate under the car when it has been parked. This water is condensation Refrigerant from the A/C system and is normal. Volvo cares about the environment. The air Display conditioning system in your car contains a The display above the climate control panel Ice and snow CFC-free refrigerant – R134a. This substance shows the climate settings that have been will not deplete the ozone layer. The system Always keep the air intake grille at the base of made. contains 1.2 lbs (530 g) R134a (HFC 134a), and the windshield free of snow. uses PAG oil. Personal settings There are two functions in the climate system that can be set to your preferences: • Blower speed to Auto mode (models with ECC only). • Timer controlled recirculation of the air in the passenger compartment.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 88 03 Climate

General information

For information about how to make these set- Side windows and power retractable tings, see the Personal settings section on hardtop page 81. The electronic climate control system will function best if the windows and power retractable Electronic Climate Control (ECC) hardtop are closed. If you drive with the win- sensors dows or hardtop open, it may be preferable to manually adjust the temperature and blower 03 • The sunlight sensor is on the upper side of the dashboard control (the LED in the AUTO switch should be off). • The passenger compartment temperature sensor is located behind the climate sys- Acceleration tem control panel. The air conditioning system is temporarily • The ambient temperature sensor is in the switched off during full throttle acceleration. driver's side door mirror. • The humidity sensor is in the rearview mirror.

NOTE The sunlight sensor monitors the side of the vehicle from which the sun shines into the passenger compartment. This means that the temperature may differ slightly between the left and right air vents, even if the climate system temperature is set to be the same for both sides of the passenger compartment.

These sensors should never be obstructed.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 89 03 Climate

Air vents

Air vents in the dashboard

03 G019942

Open Closed Horizontal air flow Vertical air flow Direct the outer air vents toward the side windows to defrost.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 90 03 Climate

Electronic Climate Control (ECC)

03 G019518

Auto – On/Off ECC functions 2. Blower speed The blower speed can be Blower speed 1. Auto – On/Off increased or decreased by Recirculation The AUTO function automat- turning the knob. The blower ically regulates climate con- speed is regulated automati- Defroster trol to maintain the desired cally if AUTO is selected. The temperature. The automatic Airflow controls previously set blower speed is function controls heating, air disconnected. A/C – ON/OFF conditioning, blower speed, recirculation, and air distribu- NOTE Heated driver's seat tion. If the knob is turned counterclockwise and Heated front passenger's seat If you select one or more manual functions, the the blower indication in the display goes remaining functions continue to be controlled out, the blower and the air conditioning are Rear window and door mirror defrosters automatically. All manual settings are switched switched off. The display shows the blower Temperature selector off when AUTO is switched on. AUTO symbol and OFF. CLIMATE is shown in the display.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 91 03 Climate

Electronic Climate Control (ECC)

3. Recirculation Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)* Keep the following in mind: This function can be used to This system consists of a mul- • As a rule, IAQS should always be engaged. shut out exhaust fumes, tifilter that helps reduce gases smoke, etc from the passen- and particles in the incoming • In cold weather, the recirculation function is limited to help avoid condensation on the ger compartment. The air in air and an air quality sensor windows. the passenger compartment that detects increased levels 03 is then recirculated, i.e., no air of contaminants in the outside • If condensation forms, using the defroster from outside the car is taken air. When the air quality sen- functions for the windshield/front side win- into the car when this function is activated. sor detects contaminated outside air, the air dows and the rear window will help clear intake closes and the air inside the passenger the condensation. If the air in the car recirculates for too long, compartment is recirculated. The filter also there is a risk of condensation forming on the 4. Defroster cleans recirculated passenger compartment insides of the windows, especially in winter. Directs airflow to the wind- air. shield and side windows and Timer When IAQS is engaged, the green indicator increases blower speed. The timer function minimizes the risk of fogging light above A is illuminated. When the defroster is acti- or stale air when the recirculation function is vated: selected, see page 81 for information on set- To activate IAQS: ting the recirculation timer. Press AUTO (1). • Air flows to the windows at high blower Or: NOTE speed. Toggle between the system's three modes by • The LED in the defroster button lights up If the defroster function is switched on (by pressing the button repeatedly. when this function is activated. The air con- pressing button 4), recirculation is always ditioning system is controlled to provide disengaged. • IAQS is engaged (the indicator light above maximum air dehumidification. A illuminates). • The air conditioning is automatically • Recirculation is engaged (the indicator switched on (can be switched off by press- light above M illuminates). ing button 6). Recirculation is switched off (both indica- • The air is not recirculated. tor lights will be off), unless ECC activates it to help cool the passenger compartment faster in hot weather.

Information Provided by:Provided Information

92 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Climate

Electronic Climate Control (ECC)

5. Airflow controls 7 and 8. Heated front seats* NOTE Press one of the three buttons Maximum heating: Press the in the illustration to activate button once – both LEDs light • On certain markets, the defrost function the selected airflow. A symbol up. may remain on longer than 20 minutes in cold weather to help keep the rear in the display above the cli- Reduced heating: Press the window free from ice or condensation. mate control panel and a lit button a second time – one LED in the selected button • This function is automatically switched LED lights up. 03 indicate that the manual func- off when the power retractable hard top tion has been selected. With manually selected Seat heating off: Press the button a third time is down. airflow both warm and cool air can be selected. – no LEDs are lit. See also the table on page 95. 10. Temperature selector 9. Rear window and door mirror The temperatures on the driv- 6. Air conditioning On/Off defrosters er's and passenger's sides ON: The air conditioning sys- Press to defrost the rear win- can be set separately using tem is engaged when the ON dow and door mirrors. the knob (with the thermome- light is lit and is controlled The rear window and door ter in it). The temperature can automatically by the system mirrors are defrosted simulta- be set for both sides of the car to maintain the selected tem- neously if the switch is when the ignition is switched perature. pressed once. The defrost on (both LEDs will be on), which means that a OFF: The system is disengaged when the function is active if the LED in the switch is illu- temperature setting will apply to both sides of OFF lights up minated. the car. When OFF is selected and the OFF LED is lit, • The function can be switched off manually To set the temperature on one side of the car: by pressing the button. the air conditioning system is deactivated. 1. Press the knob once. The LED for one side Other functions are still controlled automati- • The defrost function switches off automat- of the car will light up. Turn the knob to cally. ically after 12–20 minutes, depending on adjust the temperature. the outside temperature. When Defroster (4) is selected, the air condi- 2. Press the knob a second time to set the tioning system is activated for maximum dehu- temperature on the opposite side of the midifying. car.

Information Provided by:Provided Information

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 93 03 Climate

Electronic Climate Control (ECC)

3. Press the knob a third time to set the tem- Acceleration perature on both sides of the car at the The air conditioning system is temporarily same time. switched off during full throttle acceleration.

NOTE Selecting a temperature that is higher or 03 lower than necessary will not heat or cool the passenger compartment faster.

Sensors • The sunlight sensor is on the upper side of the dashboard • The passenger compartment temperature sensor is located behind the climate system control panel. • The ambient temperature sensor is in the driver's side door mirror. • The humidity sensor is in the rearview mirror. These sensors should never be obstructed.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 94 03 Climate

Air distribution

Air distribution Use: Air distribution Use: Defroster. Defrost/de-fog the wind- Air to the floor and win- For comfortable condi- shield and front side windows. tions and good defrosting Air is not recirculated in dows. in cold weather. this mode. There is also a certain amount of airflow to the Medium to high blower Air conditioning is always dashboard air vents. speed. 03 engaged. There is also a certain amount of airflow to the panel air vents.

Air to windshield and front Prevents fogging in cold Air to the floor and from For sunny weather with side windows. or humid weather (blower the dashboard air vents. cool ambient tempera- speed should be moder- tures. There is also a certain ate to high). amount of airflow to the dashboard air vents.

Air to the windows and For good comfort in Air to the floor. To warm the feet. from the dashboard air warm, dry weather. There is a certain amount vents. of airflow to the dashboard and window air vents.

Airflow directed to the To ensure efficient cooling Airflow to the windows, For cooler air toward the head and chest from the in a warm weather. dashboard air vents, and feet, or for warmer air dashboard air vents. floor. toward the head and chest.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 95 Front seats...... 98 Power retractable hard top ...... 106 Interior lighting...... 111 Storage compartments...... 113 Trunk ...... 117

Information Provided by:Provided Information 96 INTERIOR

Information Provided by:Provided Information 04 Interior

Front seats

Manual seat adjustment Turn this knob to adjust the backrest tilt. Accessing the rear seat Control panel for the optional power seats.

NOTE Both front seats are equipped with head restraints that can be adjusted vertically to suit the height of the passenger. The upper edge of the head restraint should be at least on a level with the upper-most point of the seat occupant's ear (see the section 04 "Adjusting the front seat head restraints" on page 104).

WARNING Do not adjust the seat while driving. Seat access buttons (power seat shown) The driver's and passenger's seats can be • adjusted in a number of ways to provide a • Adjust the driver’s seat and seat belt Seat adjustment handle (see page 20) before driving. The seat comfortable driving and sitting position. Seat adjustment button should be adjusted so that the brake Forward-rearward: Pull the lever up and pedal can be depressed fully. slide the seat to the position of your choice. • Position the seat as far rearward as Use this control to raise or lower the front comfort and control allow. edge of the seat cushion. Use this control to raise or lower the rear edge of the seat cushion. Turn this knob (optional on some passenger's seats) to adjust the firmness of the lumbar support1.

1 Also applies to the optional power seat.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 98 04 Interior

Front seats

Manual seat Moving the seat forward:

Pull up the handle. Press the handle down.

Hold the handle up and move it forward Fold the backrest forward until it locks in Remove the seat belt from its guide (see slightly until the backrest begins to move. position. page 21). Move the seat forward.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 99 04 Interior

Front seats

Moving the seat rearward: Power seat Moving the seat forward:

Press the handle down.

With the backrest folded forward in the Fold up the backrest to the upright posi- locked position, slide the seat rearward tion. Remove the seat belt from its guide (see until it stops/locks in its original position. page 21). > The seat will return to the position it was Pull up the handle. in before it was moved.

Hold the handle up and move it rearward 6. Return the seat belt to its guide. slightly until the backrest begins to move. Seat position If the seat does not return to its original position: 1. Sit in the seat. 2. Lift the handle (1) and move the seat as far rearward as possible. 3. While holding the handle up, move the seat forward to the desired position.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 100 04 Interior

Front seats

Moving the seat rearward:

Pull up the handle. Press the handle down.

Hold the handle up and move it forward Fold the backrest forward until it locks in 1. With the backrest folded forward in the slightly until the backrest begins to move. position. locked position, press and hold down the button until the seat has returned to its 6. Hold down the button while the seat moves original position. forward. If the seat is in a high position, it will be lowered automatically so that the Pull up the handle. head restraint does not come in contact Hold the handle up and move it rearward with the sun visor. slightly until the backrest begins to move.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 101 04 Interior

Front seats

Power seats* Adjusting the seat The power driver's seat can be adjusted: • If the ignition key is in position I or II. • During a 10 minute period after the doors have been unlocked if the door remains open. • If the door is closed and the ignition key is not yet in the ignition, or if the key is in position 0, the seat can be adjusted or during a period of 40 seconds. The power 04 passenger's seat can only be adjusted if the ignition key is in position I or II, or if the engine is running. G020199 Press the handle down. NOTE Seat adjustment controls Both front seats are equipped with head Fold up the backrest to the upright posi- Seat adjustment controls 1, 2, 3, and 4 on the tion. restraints that can be adjusted vertically to suit the height of the passenger. The upper side of the seat can be used to move the seat > The seat will return to its original posi- edge of the head restraint should be at least to the position of your choice. tion. on a level with the upper-most point of the Move this section of the control up or down seat occupant's ear (see the section to raise/lower the front section of the seat 6. Return the seat belt to its guide. "Adjusting the front seat head restraints" on cushion. The front passenger's seat belt should be page 104). in its guide while the vehicle is being driven, Move the control forward/rearward to even if the seat is not occupied. move the seat forward or rearward. Move this section of the control up or down WARNING to raise/lower the rear section of the seat cushion. After the seat has been returned to its original position, be sure that the backrest is Backrest tilt. securely locked in the upright position.

Information Provided by:Provided Information

102 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Interior

Front seats

NOTE Programming the seat memory, driver's 3. With the "M" button depressed, press seat only* memory button 1 to store the seat and mir- Both front seats are equipped with head rors' current position. restraints that can be adjusted vertically to suit the height of the passenger. The upper To move the seat and mirrors to the position edge of the head restraint should be at least that they were in when memory button 1 was on a level with the upper-most point of the programmed, press and hold down button 1 seat occupant's ear (see the section until the seat/mirrors stop moving. "Adjusting the front seat head restraints" on page 104). As a safety precaution, the seat will stop automatically if the button is released before the seat has reached the preset position. NOTE 04 The power seats have an overload protector Central locking system remote key and that activates if a seat is blocked by any driver's seat memory object. If this occurs, switch off the ignition The remote key transmitter can also be equip- (key in position 0) and wait for approxi- ped with an optional function that controls the G020200 mately 20 seconds before operating the electrically operated driver's seat in the follow- seat again. Power seat memory buttons ing way: Three different seating positions (and the posi- 1. Adjust the seat/door mirrors to the desired Emergency stop tion of the door mirrors) can be stored in the position. If the seat inadvertently begins to move, press seat's memory. The memory buttons are 2. When you leave the car, lock it using the any of the buttons to stop the seat. located on the outboard side of the driver’s remote key. seat (see the illustration). 3. The next time the driver's door is unlocked To program (store) a seat/mirror position in with the same remote key and that door is memory button 1: opened within 2 minutes, the driver's seat 1. Adjust the seat (and door mirrors) to the and door mirrors will automatically move to desired position. the position that they were in when the 2. Press and hold down the "M" (Memory) doors were most recently locked with the button. same remote key.

Information Provided by:Provided Information

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 103 04 Interior

Front seats

NOTE Adjusting the front seat head restraints The head restraints should be put in the upper or lower position according to the height of the The memory function in the remote key occupant of the seat. operates independently the memory function in the seat.

WARNING • Because the driver's seat can be adjusted with the ignition off, children should never be left unattended in the 04 car. • Movement of the seat can be STOPPED at any time by pressing any button on the power seat control panel. • Do not adjust the seat while driving. The seat should be adjusted so that the The front seat head restraints are designed so brake pedal can be depressed fully. In that they can be adjusted to two different addition, position the seat as far rear- height positions. ward as comfort and control allow. The upper edge of the head restraint should be at least on a level with the upper-most point of The seat rails on the floor must not be • NOTE the seat occupant's ear (see illustration). obstructed in any way when the seat is in motion. • When the vehicle leaves the factory, the To raise or lower a head restraint: front seat head restraints will be in the lower position. Raising or lowering a head restraint • Due to the low roofline of the Volvo C70, 1. Release the head restraint by pressing the it is necessary to have the front seat button underneath its left side, at the base head restraints in the lowest position if of the support (see the illustration). you wish to fold the seat's backrest for- 2. Move the head restraint until it clicks ward or operate the power retractable (locks) into the upper or lower position. hard top.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 104 04 Interior

Front seats

WARNING WARNING After adjusting the head restraint, be sure • If a front seat head restraint has been that it is securely locked in the new position removed, it must be put properly back by pressing and/or pulling it. in place and it must lock (click) into one of the available adjustment positions Removing a head restraint before the seat is occupied. The front seat head restraints can be removed, • The front seat head restraints must be for example, when cleaning the upholstery or if in position and properly adjusted to the the front passenger's seat backrest is folded height of the person sitting in the seat down to accommodate a long load. To do so: when the vehicle is driven and when the front passenger's seat is occupied. 04 1. Release the head restraint by pressing the release button underneath its left side, at the base of the support. 2. While holding in the release button, press the locking button at the base of the head restraint's right support with a screw driver, etc., and lift the head restraint until it can be removed completely.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 105 04 Interior

Power retractable hard top

Before operating the power retractable CAUTION • If the vehicle is parked outdoors, the hard top engine should be idling to help avoid bat- If the power retractable hard top is lowered tery drain. while it is wet, water may drip into the passenger compartment or trunk CAUTION • There should be at least 6.5 feet (2 meters) If the instructions on these pages are not of free space from the ground (distance A followed, damage to the power retractable hard top's mechanism may occur. in the illustration). A • There should be at least 8 inches (20 cm) of free space behind the vehicle (distance WARNING 04 B in the illustration in the center column). • The power retractable hard top must • Due to the low roofline of the Volvo C70, it not be obstructed in any way when it is is necessary to have the front seat head being operated. Always have an unob- B restraints in the lowest position (see structed view of the power retractable

G020800 page 104) before operating the power hard top when it is in motion. See also retractable hard top. the decal on the trunk divider. Please observe the following information • The ambient temperature should be above • Anyone near the vehicle should be well before operating the power retractable hard 14°F (-10°C). clear of the power retractable hard top's top: • The trunk divider (see page 107) must be moving parts before it is operated. • There should be no objects on the power closed. • Children must never be allowed to play retractable hard top's cover. • The trunk must be closed. with the power retractable hard top control button. • Remove all snow, ice or loose objects from • The vehicle must be at a standstill and the the power retractable hard top and trunk brake pedal must be pressed. • Do not leave the power retractable hard top motionless longer than necessary lid. Volvo also recommends the following: while it is being operated. • The top should be dry before it is lowered. • The vehicle should be parked outdoors, on • Do not leave the key in the ignition if level ground. there are children in the vehicle. • Raising or lowering the power retractable hard top should preferably be done in one, continuous operation.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 106 04 Interior

Power retractable hard top

Trunk divider NOTE Power retractable hard top cover If the trunk divider is not completely closed, it will not be possible to operate the power retractable hard top.

04 G020845 G020801

The purpose of the trunk divider is to indicate When lowered, the power retractable hard top the amount of cargo that can be stowed in the is concealed by a cover, see the illustration. trunk without affecting movement of the power G020847 retractable hard top. CAUTION Trunk divider decal 1. Grasp the handle and lift. Do not sit or place heavy objects on the 2. Pull the trunk divider rearward. power retractable hard top cover. 3. Be sure to close the trunk divider completely so that it locks in place on both the right and left sides.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 107 04 Interior

Power retractable hard top

Operating the power retractable hard the message TOP FULLY UP is dis- WARNING top played. • See the section “Before operating the NOTE power retractable hard top” on page 106 before operating the power retract- Due to the low roofline of the Volvo C70, it able hard top. is necessary to have the front seat head Never pull the release wire for the power restraints in the lowest position (see retractable hard top’s hydraulic system that page 104) before operating the power is located under the rear seat cushion. This retractable hard top. wire is only intended for use by qualified service personnel. Pulling this wire could lead to: 04 CAUTION • A high risk of being injured by the power • Please heed any messages that may retractable hard top mechanism. appear in the information display while the top is in operation. • Unexpected movement of the hard top, or the hard top or the trunk could inad- • Any windows that are closed will be vertently open. Power retractable hard top button opened approximately 4 inches (10 cm) while the power retractable hard top is • The retractable hard top can be dam- 1. Turn the ignition key to position II or start in operation. The windows will be auto- aged. the engine if the vehicle is parked out- matically re-closed when the top is doors. completely raised or lowered. Power retractable hard top-related text 2. Press the brake pedal. messages PRESS BRAKE TO OPERATE TOP 3. Opening the hard top: Press and hold • Press the brake pedal to operate the down the button. Release the button when retractable hard top. an audible signal sounds and the message TOP FULLY DOWN is displayed. • CLOSE TRUNK TO OPERATE TOP The trunk is open and must be closed before Closing the hard top: Pull up and hold the operating the power retractable hard top. button to raise the hard top. Release the • TRUNK DIVIDER IS NOT CLOSED The button when an audible signal sounds and trunk divider (see page 107 for more infor-

Information Provided by:Provided Information 108 04 Interior

Power retractable hard top

mation) must be closed before operating cover for the vehicle is provided in the 2. Release the button. the power retractable hard top. trunk. see page 106 for more information. 3. Pull the button again and hold it. After • TOP INOPERATIVE LOW BATTERY The • TOP MALFUNCTION SEE MANUAL The approximately 5 seconds, the power battery's charge is too low to operate the power retractable hard top must be oper- retractable hard top will begin to move. power retractable hard top. In this case, ated according to the following instruc- Hold the button up until the top is fully the top can only be raised. Start the engine, tions. raised. or if necessary, have the battery charged before operating the top. Emergency operation If the message TOP MALFUNCTION SEE NOTE • TOP IS UNLOCKED The power retractable hard top is not fully up or down. Press/ MANUAL is displayed, the power retractable Movement of the top may stop briefly. How- hard top cannot be operated in the normal way. ever, the button should be pulled up pull and hold the button again to complete 04 the operation. throughout the entire operation. An audible signal will sound during the entire operation. • TOO HOT OR COLD TO OPERATE NOTE TOP The power retractable hard top If a fault has occurred and the power retract- mechanism has overheated, or the ambi- able hard top has been raised, it cannot be WARNING lowered again until the fault has been cor- ent temperature is below 14° F (-10° C). If Never pull the release wire for the power rected. the mechanism has overheated, wait for retractable hard top’s hydraulic system that approximately 5 minutes (the message in is located under the rear seat cushion. This the information display will disappear) and CAUTION wire is only intended for use by qualified try to lower or raise the top again. service personnel. Pulling this wire could If a fault in the power retractable hard top Carefully read the information under “Before lead to: operating the power retractable hard top” mechanism occurs, the following messages High risk of being injured by the power (see page 106) before operating the power • will be displayed: retractable hard top. Damage may be retractable hard top’s opening/closing mechanism. • TOP MALFUNCTION SERVICE unavoidable if the power retractable hard REQUIRED The power retractable hard top must be operated under such condi- • Unexpected movement of the hard top/ top cannot be operated. Contact an tions. the hard top or the trunk could inadver- authorized Volvo retailer or service techni- tently open. cian. If the top is down in this situation, a 1. Press or pull the hard top control button • The retractable hard top can be dam- (see page 108) until TOP MALFUNCTION aged. SERVICE REQUIRED is displayed.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 109 04 Interior

Power retractable hard top

Wind blocker (retailer installed 4. Press the side lock tabs into the holes in accessory) the side panels until they click into place. 5. Raise the wind blocker. The zipper in the wind blocker can be opened to place or access objects in the rear seat.

CAUTION Slide in the supports carefully to avoid damaging the upholstery. 04 WARNING • Make sure the wind blocker is securely attached. An improperly secured wind

G020804 blocker may cause injury to occupants of the vehicle or to other motorists. Wind blocker • No one should be allowed to sit in the The wind blocker is intended for use while driv- rear seat when the wind blocker is in ing with the power retractable hard top down place. to help reduce swirling breezes in the passenger compartment. When not in use, the wind blocker should be Installing the wind blocker stored in its bag, in the trunk, against the rear 1. Unfold the wind blocker to its full width. seat backrest. 2. Unfold the supports on both rear sides. 3. Slide the winder blocker’s rear supports under the rear head restraints so that they rest on the upper edge of the backrest.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 110 04 Interior

Interior lighting

Interior lighting Neutral position: the interior courtesy light- 5 minutes after the engine has been switched ing comes on when a door is opened, and off. is switched off 10 seconds after the door is closed. Footwell lighting The footwell (and courtesy lighting) comes on Press the right side of the button: the inte- or goes off when one of the side doors is rior courtesy lighting stays off. opened or closed.

Courtesy lighting – automatic function Rear reading lights The interior lighting has a built-in automatic function that switches on the courtesy lighting 04 for 30 seconds when: • the car is unlocked from the outside using the key blade or remote key G020805 • the engine is switched off and the ignition Front courtesy lights and reading lights key is turned to the 0 position. Front driver's side reading light, on/off The courtesy lighting lights up or remains on for 5 minutes when: Courtesy lighting • one of the doors is opened and left open. Front passenger's side reading light, on/off • the courtesy lighting has not been The front seat reading lights can be switched switched off (the right side of button 2 on and off by pressing buttons (1) or (3) when depressed). G020806 the ignition key is position I or II, or when the The automatic lighting goes out when: Rear reading lights engine is running. • the engine is started The rear reading lights can be switched on or The courtesy lighting (2) can be set to three • the car is locked from the outside using the off by pressing the respective buttons, and positions: key blade or remote key. function if the ignition key is in positions I, II, or if the engine is running. Press the left side of the button: the interior If the courtesy lighting is not switched off man- courtesy lighting turns on. ually, it will be turned off automatically The courtesy lighting can be switched on or off within 30 minutes after the engine has been

Information Provided by:Provided Information 111 04 Interior

Interior lighting

switched off, or after a door has been opened or closed. These lights switch off automatically 5 minutes after the engine has been switched off.

Vanity mirror

04 G020210

Raise the cover to switch on the light.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 112 04 Interior

Storage compartments

Information Provided by:Provided Information 113 04 Interior

Storage compartments

Storage compartment in rear side panels Glove compartment Compartment in door panel Storage compartments in the doors Storage pocket on front side of front seat cushion Glove compartment Storage space behind center console Cup holders

04 Storage compartment for e.g., CDs Cup holders for rear seat passengers Storage compartment in rear seat cushion G024208 G030407 Storage compartment on rear side of front seat backrests The owners manual and maps can be stored Open the compartment by lifting the front lower here. There are also holders for coins, pens and section of the lid. WARNING fuel cards. The glove compartment can only be locked and unlocked using the detachable key • Anchor any heavy objects to prevent blade from the central locking system's remote them from moving during sudden stops. key. See page 124 for information on removing • Packages on the rear parcel shelf can the key blade from the remote key, and page obscure vision and may become dan- 134 for information about locking the glove gerous projectiles in the event of a sud- compartment. den stop or an accident.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 114 04 Interior

Storage compartments

Rear seat storage compartments WARNING • Press the smaller button on the front edge of the armrest and lift the armrest cover to The center of the rear seat is not a seating access a shallow storage compartment. position. This area is not equipped with a seat belt or ISOFIX/LATCH anchors. No one • Press the larger button and lift the entire should attempt to sit in this position and armrest to access a deeper compartment. child seats should never be placed in the center of the rear seat. CD storage

Storage under the front, center armrest 04

Rear seat center and side storage compartment To open a side storage compartment (on both sides of the rear seat), press on the top center of the panel. Both the forward and rearward catches should release and the panel should G026704 spring open. If one side does not open, press again directly over that catch. The deep storage compartment has room for

G018371 10 CD jewel cases. These cases must be CAUTION inserted with their spines upward in order to There are two storage compartments under the allow space for 10 cases in the storage com- Never pull the panel; the catches may be partment damaged. front, center armrest.

• Press to close and latch the panel.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 115 04 Interior

Storage compartments

Cup holders in the center console Rear cup holders/rear-center storage Storage compartment behind the compartment parking brake

04 G018372 G019624 Two cup holders are located under the sliding cover in the center console. If the buttons for optional equipment are not WARNING The cup holders can be lifted out if necessary. installed, the recess behind the parking brake To do so, grasp the indentation on the rear The center of the rear seat is not a seating can be used as a storage compartment for position. This area is not equipped with a edge of the cup holder and lift. coins, etc. seat belt or ISOFIX/LATCH anchors. No one To put the cup holder back in place: should attempt to sit in this position and child seats should never be placed in the WARNING 1. Slide the two locating tabs in the front side center of the rear seat. Objects placed in this compartment should of the cup holder into the two correspond- not interfere with the hand brake lever when ing recesses in the center console storage it is in the lifted (hand brake applied) posi- space. tion. 2. Press down the rear edge of the cup holder. To close the sliding cover, grasp the underside of the front edge and pull.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 116 04 Interior

Trunk

Loading the trunk NOTE 2. Press the button on the right side of the trunk opening. This movement is part of the normal power retractable hard top operation, which means that messages pertaining to the NOTE power retractable hard top’s operation (see There may be a delay of several seconds page 108) also apply to the this function. before the folded power retractable hard top begins to move. WARNING Movement of the top can be stopped by pressing the button again. Anyone near the vehicle should be well clear of the power retractable hard top's moving 04 parts before it is operated. 3. The folded power retractable hard top will raise slightly. If an audible signal sounds during this operation, check the informa- CAUTION

G020848 tion display in the center instrument panel • Any objects that impede the movement for messages. Button for changing level of folded power retract- of the power retractable hard top may able hard top 4. Lift the trunk divider (see page 107) to pro- damage the top or its mechanism. vide an opening into the trunk. Loading the trunk with the power When the power retractable hard top • 5. When the objects to be loaded have been retractable hard top down has been raised for loading the trunk, or placed in the trunk, press down the trunk When the power retractable hard top is down, if its movement has been interrupted by divider. it is folded in the trunk. Using the button shown pressing the button twice, the trunk in the illustration above, the folded power should not be closed. Doing so can 6. Press the button to move the power retractable hard top can be moved up or down damage the system or cause paint retractable hard top downward. Movement slightly to facilitate loading or unloading small damage. of the top can be stopped by pressing the objects. button again. To raise the level of the folded power 7. Close the trunk. retractable hard top: 1. Open the trunk.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 117 04 Interior

Trunk

NOTE Load anchoring eyelets 12-volt socket in trunk* The trunk cannot be closed while the folded power retractable hard top is in the upper position.

Raising and lowering the folded top in the event of a fault If the message TOP MALFUNCTION SERVICE REQUIRED is displayed, the folded 04 power retractable hard top can only be lowered in the trunk.

CAUTION G020850 G020856 Damage may be unavoidable if the power retractable hard top must be operated when The eyelets in the trunk can be used to fasten Fold down the lid to use the socket. this message is displayed. accessory load and lashing straps, load nets, • Using the 12-volt socket while the engine and other load anchors. is not running drains the vehicle's battery. Press the button again and hold it down. After If the ignition is switched off and a device approximately 2 seconds, the power retracta- • drawing more that 0.1A is connected to a ble hard top will begin to move. Keep the but- socket, a battery alert will be shown in the ton depressed until the folded top is lowered. driver information display. An audible signal will sound during this entire • The cover should be kept on when the aux- operation. iliary socket is not in use.

Information Provided by:Provided Information

118 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Interior

Trunk

Carrying long loads (ski hatch) Opening the plastic hatch From the trunk, press the catches in the two holes in the hatch toward each other to release the hatch, and fold it down.

NOTE If the vehicle is equipped with the optional ski bag, the bag’s zipper must be opened from the passenger’s compartment in order to insert objects through the ski hatch. 04 Replacing the backrest cushion Begin by guiding the lower section of the cushion into place. Then press the upper section of G021037 the cushion into place. Ski hatch The center section of the rear seat backrest NOTE can be opened to create space for carrying This cushion is locked in place when the long, light objects (max. length 6.5 ft/2 meters, vehicle is locked with the remote control. max. weight 55 lbs/25 kg). To do so, the center section (cushion) of the rear seat backrest must be removed, the tire repair kit (if the vehicle is Securing long objects so equipped) must be removed and stowed in Long objects should be secured with one of the the trunk, and the plastic hatch in the trunk rear seat belts. must be opened. Wrap the belt once around the object and lock the belt in the retractor as usual. If the vehicle Removing the center backrest cushion is equipped with the optional ski bag, pass the Pull the strap at the upper edge of the cushion, seat belt through the bag’s handle before fas- pull it forward, and lift it out. tening the seat belt.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 119 Remote key and key blade...... 122 Valet locking ...... 126 Keyless drive*...... 128 Locking and unlocking...... 132 Alarm...... 135

Information Provided by:Provided Information

120 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOCKS AND ALARM

Information Provided by:Provided Information 05 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

Remote keys NOTE Immobilizer (start inhibitor) Two remote keys that also function as ignition Each of the keys supplied with your car con- Additional or duplicate remote control keys keys are provided with your car. The remote can be obtained from any Authorized Volvo tains a coded transponder. The code in the key keys contain detachable metal key blades for Retailer. is transmitted to an antenna in the ignition manually locking or unlocking the driver's door switch where it is compared to the code stored You can also obtain additional or duplicate and the glove compartment. in the start inhibitor module. The car will start remote control keys from certain independ- only with a properly coded key. If you misplace USA – FCC ID: LTQVO315TX ent repair facilities and locksmiths that are qualified to make remote control keys. Each a key, take the other keys to an authorized This device complies with part 15 of the FCC key must be programmed to work with your Volvo retailer for reprogramming as an antitheft rules. Operation is subject to the following con- vehicle. measure. ditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful California Only: interference, and (2) this device must accept CAUTION any interference received, including interfer- A list of independent repair facilities and/or ence that may cause undesired operation. locksmiths known to Volvo that can cut and Never use force on the narrow section of the code replacement keys can be found: remote key – this is where the transponder is located. The car cannot be started if the 05 Canada – IC: 3659AVO315TX on the Volvo website at • transponder is damaged. Operation is subject to the following condi- http://www.volvocars.com/us/keys tions: (1) this device may not cause interfer- • by calling Volvo Customer Care at ence, and (2) this device must accept any inter- 1-800-458-1552 USA – FCC ID: LTQWFS 125VO ference, including interference that may cause This device complies with part 15 of the FCC undesired operation of the device. rules. Operation is subject to the following con- Each key blade has a unique code, which is dition: (1) This device may not cause harmful used if new key blades are required. A maxi- Loss of a remote key interference, and (2) this device must accept mum of six remote keys/key blades can be any interference received, including interfer- If either of the remote keys is lost, the other programmed and used for one car. ence that may cause undesired operation. should be taken with the car to a Volvo retailer. As an anti-theft measure, the code of the lost Canada – IC: 3659A-WFS125VO remote key must be erased from the system. Operation is subject to the following conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 122 05 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

Remote key functions Unlock – Press the Unlock button on the 2 minutes unless a door or the trunk has remote once to unlock the driver's door. been opened. After a short pause, press the Unlock but- • Automatic locking: When the car starts to ton a second time within 10 seconds to move, the doors and trunk can be locked unlock the other door and the trunk. A long automatically. This feature can be turned press (at least several seconds) opens all on or off, see Personal settings on page side windows. 81 for more information. • Airbag deployment will automatically NOTE attempt to unlock the doors. • The turn signals flash to confirm that the Approach lighting – As you approach the vehicle has been correctly locked/ car: Press the button on the remote key to unlocked with the remote key or the illuminate the area around the car in dark optional keyless drive. When locking the conditions. Pressing the button once lights vehicle, the turn signals will flash a con- up the interior lighting, parking lights, and G019402 firmation only if all the doors are license plate lighting. These lights will 05 securely closed and locked. Flashing switch off automatically after 30, 60 or Lock – Press the Lock button on the confirmation for locking and unlocking 90 seconds. See the Personal settings pa remote once to lock the doors and the may be customized in the vehicle's Per- ge 81 for information about adjusting the trunk. The turn signals will flash once to sonal settings menu, see page 81 for time setting. confirm locking. more information. Unlock trunk – Press the button once to • The two-step unlocking function can be disarm the alarm system and unlock only NOTE changed so that one press of the the trunk. After closing, the trunk will not Unlock button unlocks both doors and The car can also be locked if a door is open automatically relock. Press Lock to relock the trunk. See Personal settings page (does not apply to vehicles with the optional it and rearm the alarm. keyless drive). 81 for more information. NOTE • Automatic relocking: If the doors are unlocked, the locks will automatically reen- This function will unlock, but not pop open, gage (re-lock) and the alarm will rearm after the trunk.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 123 05 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

Panic alarm – This button can be used to When the battery begins to lose its charge, the The old battery should be disposed of properly attract attention during emergency situa- Information symbol in the instrument panel at a recycling center or by a trained and quali- tions. To activate the panic alarm, press (see page 56) lights up and KEY BATTERY fied Volvo service technician. and hold the red button for at least 3 sec- LOW VOLTAGE is shown in the information onds or press it twice within 3 seconds. display. Key blade The turn signals and horn will be activated. The panic alarm will stop automatically Replacing the battery in the remote key after 30 seconds. To deactivate, wait approximately 5 seconds and press the red If the range of the transmitter is noticeably button again. reduced, this indicates that the battery (type CR 2450, 3V) is weak and should be replaced. To replace the battery: NOTE 1. Place the remote key with the keypad This button will NOT unlock the car. downward. Pry open the cover with a small slotted screwdriver. 05 Weak battery in the remote key 2. Remove the cover.

CAUTION G019403 When replacing the battery, avoid touching the electrical circuitry in the other half of the Removing the key blade remote key. The key blade can be removed from the remote key. When removed, it can be used as follows: 3. Note how the + and – sides of the battery are positioned on the inside of the cover • To lock/unlock the driver’s door (see the underside of the cover). • To lock/unlock the glove compartment, see page 134. 4. Pry out and replace the battery. Avoid touching the battery and its contact surfa- • To open the trunk mechanically, see ces with your fingers. page 133.

G019406 • For valet locking (see page 126) 5. Press the cover back into place.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 124 05 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

Removing the key blade Locking the doors with the detached key Slide the spring loaded catch to the side. blade 1. Lock the other door(s) by pressing the lock While holding the catch, pull the key blade button on each door. Please note that this out of the remote key. does not arm the alarm or lock the trunk. Reinserting the key blade in the remote 2. Turn the key blade one-quarter turn coun- key ter-clockwise to lock the driver's door. 1. Hold the remote key with the pointed end down. 2. Carefully slide the key blade into its groove. 3. Gently press the key blade in the groove until it clicks into place.

Unlocking the doors with the detached key blade 05 1. Insert the key blade as far as possible in the driver's door lock. 2. Turn the key blade clockwise approximately one-quarter turn to unlock the driver's door only.

NOTE After unlocking the driver's door with the key blade, opening the door will trigger the alarm.

To disable the alarm Press the Unlock button on the remote key, or insert the key in the ignition switch.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 125 05 Locks and alarm

Valet locking

Locking points

Normal locking/unlocking points for the Steering wheel lock remote key with the key blade in place (valet locking not activated): By utilizing the remote key with the key blade removed, the valet locking feature enables you Doors to block access to the trunk and glove com- Steering wheel lock partment for e.g., valet parking or when the car is brought to the retailer for service. Glove compartment Trunk Locking/unlocking points for the remote key with the key blade removed (valet locking activated): Doors

Information Provided by:Provided Information 126 05 Locks and alarm

Valet locking

Activating the valet locking function Turn the key blade 180° clockwise to lock the glove compartment and to disconnect points C and D from the central locking system (a message appears in the information display). Remove the key blade from the glove compartment lock. Give the parking attendant or service personnel only the remote key (with the key blade removed).

Deactivating the valet locking function Turn the key blade 180° counterclockwise in the glove compartment lock to deactivate valet G020032 locking (the trunk can then be unlocked using 05 the remote key). Begin by removing the key blade from the remote key (see page 124). For information on locking/unlocking the glove compartment normally, see page 132 NOTE The first stages of opening the power retractable hard top offer temporary access to the contents of the trunk. Therefore, before activating valet locking, the power retractable hard top must be up and the trunk divider (see page 107) must be open. This makes it impossible to operate the power retractable hard top.

Insert the key in the glove compartment lock.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 127 05 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive*

Keyless locking and unlocking Both of the remote keys provided with the vehi- Locking the vehicle cle have the keyless function, and additional remotes can be ordered. The system can accommodate up to six keyless drive remote keys.

NOTE The number of doors that are unlocked at the same time can be set in the Personal settings menu, see page 81 for additional information.

Unlocking the vehicle A keyless drive remote key must be on the

• G020033 G019418 same side of the vehicle as the door to be 05 Range of the keyless drive remote key–5 ft opened, and be within 5 feet (1.5 meters) Keyless drive lock button (1.5 meters) of the lock or the trunk opening control (see The doors and the trunk can be locked by the shaded areas in the illustration). This system makes it possible to unlock and pressing the lock button in any of the outside lock the vehicle without having to use the • Pull a door handle to unlock and open the door handles. remote key. It is only necessary to have a key- door or press the trunk opening control. less drive remote key in your possession to • See page 149 for information on starting a NOTE operate the central locking system. vehicle equipped with keyless drive. • If one or more doors and/or the trunk is not fully closed when the lock button is NOTE pressed, the door(s) or trunk will not be The buttons on the keyless drive remote key locked. can also be used to lock and unlock the • On keyless drive vehicles, the gear vehicle, see page 122 for more information. selector must be in the Park (P) position and the ignition must be switched off before the doors/trunk can be locked.

Information Provided by:Provided Information

128 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive*

Locking or unlocking the vehicle with the to unlock the driver's door only. This will NOTE key blade trigger the alarm. If several people carrying keyless drive • To disable the alarm: Press the Unlock remote keys approach the vehicle at the button on the keyless drive remote key. If same time, the driver's seat will assume the the batteries in the remote are weak, position it was in for the person who opens remove the keyless drive start control from a door first. the ignition switch by pressing the catch (see the illustration on page 149) and pulling the control out of the ignition switch. Keyless drive information messages Insert the ignition key section of a keyless If anyone leaves the vehicle with the only key- drive remote key in the ignition switch. less drive remote key in his or her possession while the ignition is switched on, a message will Keyless drive remote key and driver's be shown in the information display and an seat memory audible signal will sound. This function is only available on vehicles equipped with the optional power driver's seat. G020225 NOTE 05 When you leave the car with a keyless drive Keyless drive keyhole cover • This message will only be displayed if the remote key in your possession and lock start control is in position I or II. The driver's door on vehicles equipped with any door, the position of the driver's seat keyless drive can be locked or unlocked with will be stored in the seat's memory. The message will be erased from the display the remote key's detachable key blade if nec- • The next time a door is opened by a person and the audible signal will stop when the essary, see page 124 for information on remov- with the same remote key in his/her pos- remote key has been returned to the vehicle ing the key blade from the remote key. To session, the driver's seat will automatically and one of the following has occurred: access the keyhole in the driver's door: move to the position that it was in when the • A door has been opened and closed • Pry off the keyhole cover by inserting the door was most recently locked. key blade or a small screwdriver in the hole • The start control has been turned to posi- on the underside of the cover (indicated by tion 0 the arrow in the inset illustration). • The READ button (see page 61 for the • Insert the key blade as far as possible in the location of this button) has been pressed. driver's door lock. Turn the key blade clockwise approximately one-quarter turn

Information Provided by:Provided Information

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 129 05 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive*

CAUTION KR55WK48964 NOTE • Keyless drive remote keys should never be left in the vehicle. In the event of a This device complies with part 15 of the FCC break-in, a remote found in the vehicle Rules. Operation is subject to the following two could make it possible to start the conditions: (1) This device may not cause engine. harmful interference, and (2) this device must • Electromagnetic fields or metal accept interference received, including inter- obstructions can interfere with the key- ference that may cause undesired operation. less drive system. Avoid placing the CAUTION remote key near cellular phones, metal- lic objects or e.g., in a metal briefcase. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Canada – IC:267T- 5WK48952, G020077 Siemens VDO 05 267T- 5WK48964, 267T-5WK48891 5WK48891 On the inside center of the rear bumper NOTE Tested To Comply With FCC Standards Under the floor of the trunk, near the rear This device complies with RSS -210 of Industry seat Canada. Operation is subject to the following For Automobile Use Left door handle two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must Location of the keyless drive antennas Under the rear section of the center con- accept interference received, including inter- The keyless drive system has a number of sole ference that may cause undesired operation. antennas located at various points in the vehi- Right door handle CAUTION cle. Under the front section of the center con- Changes or modifications not expressly sole approved by the manufacturer could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

USA – FCC ID:KR55WK48952,

Information Provided by:Provided Information

130 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive*

WARNING People with implanted pacemakers should not allow the pacemaker to come closer than 9 inches (22 cm) to any of the keyless drive system's antennas. This is to help prevent interference between the pacemaker and the keylesss drive system.

Information Provided by:Provided Information

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 131 05 Locks and alarm

Locking and unlocking

Locking/unlocking the vehicle from the NOTE inside Please be aware that locking the vehicle in this way makes it possible to lock the remote key in the passenger compartment. To help avoid this, lock the vehicle from the outside by pressing the lock button on the remote key. If the vehicle is locked using the central locking button, be sure that the remote key is in your possession before closing the door.

Lock indicator lights G020867 An indicator light in each door will illuminate for Lock indicator light approximately 5 minutes after the car has been

05 G020865 locked using the remote key. Alternative locking when parking The switches near the door opening handles on The central locking button on the driver's door • If doors are locked: The indicator lights will either door can be used to lock or unlock both can also be used to lock the vehicle when you flash once. doors and the trunk, and to set the alarm. leave it. To do so: • If doors are Unlocked: The indicator lights will flash twice Unlocking: Press the upper section of the 1. Open the door. switch. • During driving with doors locked: The indi- 2. Press the lock section of the button. cator lights will be Off. Locking: Press the lower section of the 3. Close the door. This will lock the vehicle switch. completely and arm the alarm.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 132 05 Locks and alarm

Locking and unlocking

NOTE Opening the trunk from the inside1 Mechanically opening the trunk • The doors cannot be opened by pulling up the lock buttons. • If both doors are closed when a lock button is pressed, the alarm will not be armed. • Each door can also be locked manually using the lock button on that particular door. This applies only if the car has not been locked from the outside. • The doors can also be unlocked (and the door opened) by pulling the handle in the door twice. G016334 G030709 05 The vehicle is equipped with a florescent han- 1. Fold down the driver’s seat backrest to dle on the inside of the trunk lid, which can be access the keyhole near the floor of the used in an emergency situation to open the rear seat. trunk from the inside. 2. Fold up the tab covering the key hole. • Pull the handle down to release the trunk 3. Insert the key blade in the keyhole and turn lid. it 110 degrees clockwise. After use, the handle must be pushed back into its original position before the trunk can be CAUTION closed. This function should never be used when the power retractable hard top is in motion. This could cause damage to the trunk lid/ hard top.

1 U.S. models only. Information Provided by:Provided Information 133 05 Locks and alarm

Locking and unlocking

Locking the glove compartment G020034 05 The glove compartment can only be locked and unlocked using the detachable key blade on the remote key, see page 124 for information on removing the key blade from the remote key. Insert the key blade in the glove compartment lock. Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise.

Remove the key blade from the lock.

Unlock the glove compartment in the reverse order.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 134 05 Locks and alarm

Alarm

The alarm system The alarm indicator light • Fault in the alarm system: If a fault has The alarm is automatically armed whenever the been detected in the alarm system, a mes- car is locked with the remote key, or if a front sage will be shown in the information dis- lock button is depressed. play. Contact your Volvo retailer to have the alarm system inspected and repaired if When armed, the alarm continuously monitors necessary. a number of points on the car. The following conditions will trigger the alarm: Arming the alarm • The hood is forced open. Press the LOCK button on the remote key, • The trunk is forced open. or press the central lock button on one of • A door is forced open. the front doors with the door open. One long flash of the turn signals will confirm The ignition switch is tampered with • that the alarm is armed. • An attempt is made to start the car with a

non-approved key (a key not coded to the G020227 car's ignition). Disarming the alarm 05 Alarm indicator light If there is movement in the passenger com- Press the UNLOCK button on the remote • 1 partment (if the car is equipped with the The status of the alarm system is indicated by key or insert the key in the ignition to dis- optional movement sensor). the indicator light on at the top of the dash- arm the alarm. Two short flashes from the board (see the illustration): car's direction indicators confirm that the The car is lifted or towed (if the car is equip- • alarm has been deactivated and that all ped with the optional inclination sensor) • Indicator light off – the alarm is not armed doors are unlocked. • The battery is disconnected (while the • The indicator light flashes every two sec- alarm is armed). onds – the alarm is armed • The siren is disconnected when the alarm • The indicator light flashes rapidly before is disarmed. the ignition is switched on – the alarm has • The alarm system functions in the same been triggered. The message ALARM way, regardless of whether the power TRIGGERED CHECK CAR will also be retractable hard top is raised or lowered. displayed.

1 On vehicles with the optional keyless drive, press in the start control in the ignition switch. Information Provided by:Provided Information 135 05 Locks and alarm

Alarm

Turning off (stopping) the alarm Temporarily turning off the accessory In certain situations it may be desirable to turn If the alarm is sounding, it can be stopped by alarm sensor(s) off the accessory inclination and movement pressing the UNLOCK button on the remote alarm sensors, and the double locking function key or by inserting the key in the ignition switch. if, for example, you drive your vehicle onto a The driver's door must first be unlocked with ferry where the rocking of the boat could trigger the key blade. the alarm or if a pet is left in the vehicle with the doors locked. NOTE To do so: On vehicles equipped with the optional key- 1. Press MENU to enter the menu system and less drive, the start control must be scroll to Car settings… (for a more removed from the ignition switch before the detailed description of the menus, see key can be inserted, see page 149 for page 81. instructions. 2. Select Reduced guard….

05 Audible/visual alarm signal 3. Select Activate once and the message REDUCED GUARD SEE MANUAL will An audible alarm signal is given by a battery appear in the information display. The powered siren. The alarm cycle lasts for alarm sensors and/or double locking func- 30 seconds. tion will be turned off when the vehicle is locked. NOTE or The visual alarm signal is given by flashing G026313 all turn signals and turning on the interior Select Ask on exit. Each time the ignition lighting for approximately 5 minutes. Display key is turned to position 0, the message MENU Reduced guard ask on exit Press ENTER to reduce guard until engine EXIT has started. Press EXIT to cancel. will be displayed. Select one of the alterna- ENTER tives: Menu navigation controls

Information Provided by:Provided Information 136 05 Locks and alarm

Alarm

• If the alarm sensors are to be deactivated, Canada IC: 4405A-DA 5823(3) press ENTER and then lock the vehicle. Movement sensor DA5823 by Dynex Operation • If the vehicle is equipped with the double is subject to the following conditions: (1) this locking function, it will be deactivated at device may not cause interference, and (2) this the same time. device must accept any interference, including The next time the ignition key is turned to posi- interference that may cause undesired operation II, the sensors will be reactivated and tion of the device. FULL GUARD will displayed. or • If you do not wish to deactivate the sensors, do not choose an alternative and lock the vehicle or press EXIT and lock the vehicle.

05 CAUTION • The accessory sensors are automatically reconnected to the alarm system the next time the vehicle is unlocked and then locked again. • This function will not turn off the vehicle's standard alarm.

U.S.A. FCC ID: MAYDA 5823(3) This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 137 General information...... 140 Fuel requirements...... 143 Ignition switch...... 146 Starting the vehicle...... 147 Starting the vehicle with keyless drive*...... 149 Automatic transmission...... 151 Shiftlock override...... 153 Brake system...... 154 Parking brake...... 157 Stability system...... 158 Towing...... 160 Jump starting...... 163 Towing a trailer...... 164 Detachable trailer hitch...... 166 Transporting loads...... 167 Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)*...... 168 Rear park assist*...... 172

Information Provided by:Provided Information

138 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. STARTING AND DRIVING

Information Provided by:Provided Information 06 Starting and driving

General information

Economical driving conserves natural • At highway driving speeds, fuel consump- Weight distribution affects handling resources tion will be lower with the air conditioning At the specified curb weight your vehicle has a Better driving economy may be obtained by on and the windows closed than with the tendency to understeer, which means that the air conditioning off and the windows open. thinking ahead, avoiding rapid starts and stops steering wheel has to be turned more than and adjusting the speed of your vehicle to • Using the onboard trip computer's fuel might seem appropriate for the curvature of a immediate traffic conditions. consumption modes can help you learn bend. This ensures good stability and reduces how to drive more economically. the risk of rear wheel skid. Remember that Observe the following rules: these properties can alter with the vehicle load. Other factors that decrease gas mileage • Bring the engine to normal operating tem- The heavier the load in the cargo area, the less perature as soon as possible by driving are: the tendency to understeer. with a light foot on the accelerator pedal for • Dirty air cleaner the first few minutes of operation. A cold Dirty engine oil and clogged oil filter • Handling, roadholding engine uses more fuel and is subject to • Dragging brakes increased wear. Vehicle load, tire design and inflation pressure • Incorrect front end alignment • Whenever possible, avoid using the vehicle all affect vehicle handling. Therefore, check for driving short distances. This does not Some of the above mentioned items and others that the tires are inflated to the recommended allow the engine to reach normal operating are checked at the standard maintenance pressure according to the vehicle load. See the temperature. intervals. "Tire pressure" section. Loads should be dis- tributed so that capacity weight or maximum Drive carefully and avoid rapid acceleration • permissible axle loads are not exceeded. 06 and hard braking. WARNING • Use the transmission's Drive (D) position Driving with the trunk open: Driving with as often as possible and avoid using kick- the trunk open could lead to poisonous Driving through water down. exhaust gases entering the passenger com- The vehicle can be driven through water up to partment. If the trunk must be kept open for • Do not exceed posted speed limits. a depth of approximately 9 in. (25 cm), at a any reason, proceed as follows: maximum speed of 6 mph (10 km/h). Avoid carrying unnecessary items (extra • 1. Close the windows. load) in the vehicle. • Take particular care when driving through 2. Set the ventilation system control to air flowing water. Maintain correct tire pressure. Check tire • flow to floor, windshield and side win- pressure regularly (when tires are cold). • Clean the electrical connections for trailer dows and the blower control to its high- wiring after driving in mud or water • Remove snow tires when threat of snow or est setting. ice has ended. • When driving through water, maintain low speed and do not stop in the water.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 140 06 Starting and driving

General information

WARNING Cold weather precautions or in warm weather, see page 277 for more If you wish to check your vehicle before the information. After driving through water, press lightly on the brake pedal to ensure that the brakes approach of cold weather, the following advice • The load placed on the battery is greater are functioning normally. Water or mud can is worth noting: during the winter since the windshield wipers, lighting, etc. are used more often. make the brake linings slippery, resulting in • Make sure that the engine coolant contains delayed braking effect. Moreover, the capacity of the battery 50 percent antifreeze. Any other mixture decreases as the temperature drops. In will reduce freeze protection. This gives very cold weather, a poorly charged bat- CAUTION protection against freezing down to –31 °F tery can freeze and be damaged. It is there- (–35 °C). See section "Coolant". The use of fore advisable to check the state of charge • Engine damage will occur if water is "recycled" antifreeze is not approved by drawn into the air cleaner. more frequently and spray an anti-rust oil Volvo. Different types of antifreeze must on the battery posts. • If the vehicle is driven through water not be mixed. • Volvo recommends the use of snow tires deeper than 9 in. (25 cm), water may • Volvo recommends using only genuine enter the differential and the transmis- on all four wheels for winter driving – see Volvo antifreeze in your vehicle's radiator. the chapter "Wheels and tires." sion. This reduces the oil's lubricating Your Volvo retailer stocks plenty of Volvo capacity and may shorten the service engine coolant to help protect your vehicle • To prevent the washer fluid reservoir from life of these components. during cold weather. freezing, add washer solvents containing antifreeze (see page 218 for the location of • Do not allow the vehicle to stand in • Try to keep the fuel tank well filled – this the washer fluid reservoir). This is impor- water up to the door sills longer than prevents the formation of condensation in absolutely necessary. This could result tant since dirt is often splashed on the 06 the tank. In addition, in extremely cold windshield during winter driving, requiring in electrical malfunctions. weather conditions it is worthwhile to add the frequent use of the washers and wip- • If the engine has been stopped while the fuel line de-icer before refueling. ers. Volvo Washer Solvent should be dilu- car is in water, do not attempt to restart • The viscosity of the engine oil is important. ted as follows: Down to 14 °F (–10 °C): the engine. Have the car towed out of Oil with low viscosity (thinner oil) improves 1 part washer solvent and 4 parts water the water. cold-weather starting as well as decreas- Down to 5 °F (–15 °C): 1 part washer sol- ing fuel consumption while the engine is vent and 3 parts water Down to 0 °F warming up. For winter use, 5W-30 oil, par- (–18 °C): 1 part washer solvent and 2 parts ticularly the synthetic type1, is recommended. Be sure to use good quality oil but do not use cold-weather oil for hard driving

1 Synthetic oil is not used when the oil is changed at the normal maintenance intervals except at owner request and at additional charge. Please consult your Volvo retailer. Information Provided by:Provided Information 141 06 Starting and driving

General information

water Down to –18 °F (–28 °C): 1 part current even with the ignition switched off, • Check that engine runs smoothly and that washer solvent and 1 part water. which drains the battery. fuel consumption is normal. • Use Volvo Teflon Lock Spray in the locks. • Check for fuel, oil, and fluid leakage NOTE • Have the transmission oil level checked2. NOTE • If the ignition is switched on, a warning • Check condition of drive belts. message will be displayed in the text Avoid using de-icing sprays as they can • Check state of the battery's charge. cause damage to the locks. window in the instrument panel when the battery charge is low. • Examine tires carefully (the spare tire as • An energy conserving function well), and replace those that are worn. Conserving electrical current designed into the vehicle's electrical Check tire pressures. Keep the following in mind to help minimize system will switch off certain functions • The brakes, front wheel alignment, and battery drain: or reduce the load on the battery by, steering gear should be checked by your e.g., reducing the audio system's vol- Volvo retailer only. • When the engine is not running, avoid turn- ume. ing the ignition key to position II. Many • Check all lights, including high beams. electrical systems (the audio system, the • Reflective warning triangles are legally optional navigation system, power win- Before a long distance trip required in some states/provinces. dows, etc) will function with the ignition key • Have a word with your Volvo retailer if you in position I. This position reduces drain on It is always worthwhile to have your vehicle checked at a trained and qualified Volvo serv- intend to drive in countries where it may be the battery. difficult to obtain the correct fuel. 06 ice technician before driving long distances. • Please keep in mind that using systems, Your trained and qualified Volvo service tech- • Consider your destination. If you will be accessories, etc that consume a great deal nician will also be able to supply you with driving through an area where snow or ice of current when the engine is not running bulbs, fuses, spark plugs and wiper blades for are likely to occur, consider snow tires. could result in the battery being completely your use in the event that problems occur. drained. Driving or having the engine running for approximately 15 minutes will help As a minimum, the following items should be keep the battery charged. checked before any long trip: • The optional 12 volt socket in the trunk (certain models only) provides electrical

2 To prevent injury from contact with hot surfaces, do not inspect your vehicle's transmission fluid yourself. Have your vehicle's transmission fluid level inspected by a qualified Volvo service technician.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 142 06 Starting and driving

Fuel requirements

Octane rating change gasoline brands to fully utilize your Use of Additives engine's capacity, and for the smoothest pos- With the exception of gas line antifreeze during Minimum octane sible operation. winter months, do not add solvents, thicken- ers, or other store-bought additives to your NOTE vehicle's fuel, cooling, or lubricating systems. Overuse may damage your engine, and some When switching to higher octane fuel or changing gasoline brands, it may be neces- of these additives contain organically volatile sary to fill the tank more than once before a chemicals. Do not needlessly expose yourself difference in engine operation is noticeable. to these chemicals.

Fuel Formulations WARNING Do not use gasoline that contains lead as a Never carry a cell phone that is switched knock inhibitor, and do not use lead additives. on while refueling your vehicle. If the phone G028920 Besides damaging the exhaust emission con- rings, this may cause a spark that could trol systems on your vehicle, lead has been ignite gasoline fumes, resulting in fire and Typical pump octane label injury. strongly linked to certain forms of cancer. Volvo recommends premium fuel for best performance, but using 87 octane1 or above will Many fuels contain benzene as a solvent. WARNING not affect engine reliability. Unburned benzene has been strongly linked to certain forms of cancer. If you live in an area Carbon monoxide is a poisonous, colorless, 06 Volvo engines are designed to achieve rated where you must fill your own gas tank, take and odorless gas. It is present in all exhaust horsepower, torque, and fuel economy per- precautions. These may include: gases. If you ever smell exhaust fumes formance using premium 91 octane fuel. inside the vehicle, make sure the passenger • standing upwind away from the filler nozzle compartment is ventilated, and immediately Demanding driving while refueling return the vehicle to a trained and qualified In demanding driving conditions, such as oper- • refueling only at gas stations with vapor Volvo service technician for correction. ating the vehicle in hot weather, towing a trailer, recovery systems that fully seal the mouth or driving for extended periods at higher alti- of the filler neck during refueling tudes than normal, it may be advisable to • wearing neoprene gloves while handling a switch to higher octane fuel (91 or higher) or to fuel filler nozzle.

1 AKI (ANTI KNOCK INDEX) is an average of the Research Octane Number (RON) and the Motor Octane Number (MON), MON+RON/2. Information Provided by:Provided Information 143 06 Starting and driving

Fuel requirements

Deposit control gasoline (detergent ness of the emission control system and could use of the following "oxygenated" fuels; how- additives) result in loss of emission warranty coverage. ever, the octane ratings listed on this page Volvo recommends the use of detergent gas- State and local vehicle inspection programs must still be met. will make detection of misfueling easier, pos- oline to control engine deposits. Detergent Alcohol – Ethanol: Fuels containing up to 10% sibly resulting in emission test failure for mis- gasoline is effective in keeping injectors and ethanol by volume may be used. Ethanol may fueled vehicles. intake valves clean. Consistent use of deposit also be referred to as Ethyl alcohol, or "Gaso- control gasolines will help ensure good driva- hol". bility and fuel economy. If you are not sure NOTE whether the gasoline contains deposit control Ethers – MTBE: Fuels containing up to 15% Some U.S. and Canadian gasolines contain MTBE may be used. additives, check with the service station oper- an octane enhancing additive called methyl- ator. cyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl Methanol (MMT). If such fuels are used, your Emission Do not use gasolines containing methanol NOTE Control System performance may be affected, and the Check Engine Light (malfunc- (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). This practice Volvo does not recommend the use of tion indicator lamp) located on your instru- can result in vehicle performance deterioration store-bought fuel injector cleaning addi- ment panel may light. If this occurs, please and can damage critical parts in the fuel sys- tives. return your vehicle to a trained and qualified tem. Such damage may not be covered under Volvo service technician for maintenance. the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Unleaded fuel Fuel filler door 06 Each Volvo has a three-way catalytic converter Gasoline containing alcohol and ethers Press the button on the light switch panel (see and must use only unleaded gasoline. U.S. and Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing the illustration on page 66) Canadian regulations require that pumps deliv- "oxygenates" which are usually alcohols or with the ignition ering unleaded gasoline be labelled "UNLEA- ethers. In some areas, state or local laws switched off to unlock the fuel filler door. DED". Only these pumps have nozzles which require that the service pump be marked indi- Please note that the fuel filler door will remain fit your vehicle's filler inlet. It is unlawful to dis- cating use of alcohols or ethers. However, unlocked until the vehicle begins to move for- pense leaded fuel into a vehicle labelled there are areas in which the pumps are ward. An audible click will be heard when the "unleaded gasoline only". Leaded gasoline unmarked. If you are not sure whether there is fuel filler door relocks. damages the three-way catalytic converter and alcohol or ethers in the gasoline you buy, check If you intend to leave your vehicle while it is the heated oxygen sensor system. Repeated with the service station operator. To meet sea- being refueled, this feature enables you to lock use of leaded gasoline will lessen the effective- sonal air quality standards, some areas require the doors/trunk while leaving the fuel filler door the use of "oxygenated" fuel. Volvo allows the unlocked.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 144 06 Starting and driving

Fuel requirements

You can also keep the vehicle locked if you CAUTION under the New Vehicle Limited War- remain inside it during refueling. The central ranty. locking button does not lock the fuel filler door. • Do not refuel with the engine running2. Turn the ignition off or to position I. If the Be sure the fuel filler door is not obstructed and ignition is on, an incorrect reading could is completely closed after refueling. Open the occur in the fuel gauge fuel filler cap slowly during hot weather. • After refueling, close the fuel filler cap by turning it clockwise until it clicks into Refueling place. The fuel tank is designed to accommodate • Avoid overfilling the fuel tank. Do not possible expansion of the fuel in hot weather, press the handle on the filler nozzle see page 275 for fuel tank volume. Be aware more than one extra time. Too much fuel that the "usable" tank capacity will be some- in the tank in hot weather conditions can what less than the specified maximum. When cause the fuel to overflow. Overfilling the fuel level is low, such factors as ambient could also cause damage to the emis- temperature, the fuel's "Reid vapor pressure" sion control systems. characteristics, and terrain can affect the fuel • Avoid spilling gasoline during refueling. pump's ability to supply the engine with an In addition to causing damage to the adequate supply of fuel. Therefore, it is advis- environment, gasolines containing able to refuel as soon as possible when the alcohol can cause damage to painted 06 needle nears the red zone, or when the fuel surfaces, which may not be covered warning light comes on. under the New Vehicle Limited War- ranty. • Do not use gasolines containing methanol (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). This practice can result in vehicle performance deterioration and can damage critical parts in the fuel system. Such damage may not be covered

2 If the fuel filler cap is not closed tightly or if the engine is running when the vehicle is refueled, the Check Engine Light (malfunction indicator lamp) may indicate a fault. However, your vehicle’s performance will not be affected. Use only Volvo original or approved fuel filler caps.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 145 06 Starting and driving

Ignition switch

Ignition switch positions II – Drive position The key's position when driv- 0 – Locked position ing. The vehicle's entire elec- Remove the key to lock the trical system is activated. steering wheel1. Never turn the key to position 0 while driving or when the vehicle is being towed. III – Start position Turn the key to this position NOTE and release it immediately. The key returns automatically A ticking sound may be audible if the key is to the Drive position. turned to a position between 0 and I. To stop this sound, turn the key to position II A chime will sound if the key and back to position 0. is left in the ignition and the driver's door is opened (does not apply to vehi- I – Intermediate position2 cles with the optional keyless drive). Certain accessories, radio, etc. on, daytime running lights 06 off.

1 Automatic transmission: the gear selector must be in the Park position. The optional keyless drive start control does not need to be removed. 2 Please be aware that leaving the key in positions I or II will increase battery drain.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 146 06 Starting and driving

Starting the vehicle

To start the engine ate automatically (for up to ten seconds) NOTE until the engine starts. If the engine fails to WARNING start, repeat this step. • Immobilizer: If two of the keys to your Before starting, check that the seat, steering vehicle are close together, e.g., on the wheel and mirrors are adjusted properly. 4. To release the gear selector from the Park same key ring when you try to start the Make sure the brake pedal can be (P) position, the engine must be running (or vehicle, this could cause interference in depressed completely. Adjust the seat if the ignition key must be in position II) and the immobilizer system and result in the necessary. the brake pedal must be depressed. vehicle not starting. If this should occur, 5. Select the desired gear. The gear engages remove one of the keys from the key ring before trying to start the vehicle 1. Fasten the seat belt. after a very slight delay, which is especially again. 2. Apply the parking brake if not already set. noticeable when selecting R. • Keylock: The automatic transmission The gear selector should be locked in the WARNING has a keylock system. When the engine Park (P) position (Shiftlock). See also page is switched off, the gear selector must 153. • Never use more the one floor mat at one be in the Park (P) position before the key time on the driver's floor. An extra mat can be removed from the ignition NOTE on the driver's floor can cause the switch1. accelerator and/or brake pedal to After a cold start, idle speed may be notice- • When starting in cold weather, an auto- ably higher than normal for a short period. catch. Check that the movement of matic transmission may shift up at This is done to help bring components in the these pedals is not impeded. slightly higher engine speeds than nor- emission control system to their normal • Volvo's floor mats are specially manu- mal until the automatic transmission 06 operating temperature as quickly as possi- factured for your car. They must be fluid reaches normal operating tem- ble, which enables them to control emis- firmly secured in the clips on the floor so perature. sions and help reduce the vehicle's impact that they cannot slide and become trap- on the environment. • Do not race a cold engine immediately ped under the pedals on the driver's after starting. Oil flow may not reach side. some lubrication points fast enough to 3. The vehicle is equipped with an autostart prevent engine damage. feature. Without touching the throttle pedal, turn the key to position III and release it. The starter motor will then oper-

1 The optional keyless drive start control does not need to be removed from the ignition switch. Information Provided by:Provided Information 147 06 Starting and driving

Starting the vehicle

WARNING • Always place the gear selector in Park (P) and apply the parking brake before leaving the vehicle. Never leave the vehicle unattended with the engine running. • Always open garage doors fully before starting the engine inside a garage to ensure adequate ventilation. The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, which is invisible and odorless but very poisonous.

CAUTION Automatic transmission: The engine should be idling when you move the gear selector. Never accelerate until after you feel the transmission engage! Accelerating 06 immediately after selecting a gear will cause harsh engagement and premature transmission wear. Selecting P or N when idling at a standstill for prolonged periods of time will help prevent overheating of the automatic transmission fluid.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 148 06 Starting and driving

Starting the vehicle with keyless drive*

Starting a vehicle with keyless drive WARNING NOTE • Never use more the one floor mat at one The vehicle is equipped with an autostart time on the driver's floor. An extra mat function that makes it possible to start the on the driver's floor can cause the engine without holding the start control in accelerator and/or brake pedal to position III. Turn the start control to posi- catch. Check that the movement of tion III and release it. The starter motor will these pedals is not impeded. then operate automatically (for up to ten seconds) until the engine starts. • Volvo's floor mats are specially manufactured for your car. They must be firmly secured in the clips on the floor so Starting the vehicle with the ignition key that they cannot slide and become trap- (remote key) ped under the pedals on the driver's A vehicle with keyless drive can also be started side. with the ignition key (if, for example, the battery in the keyless drive remote key is weak). To do G019410 so: NOTE Keyless drive makes it possible to unlock, start A keyless drive remote key must be inside and lock the vehicle without using a remote the vehicle in order to start the engine. key. A start control is fitted in the ignition switch on 1. Press the brake pedal. 06 vehicles equipped with the optional keyless drive. This control is used in the same way as 2. Press in the keyless drive start control and the ignition key to start the engine. See also turn it to position III. page 147 for general information on starting the engine. G019420

Removing the keyless drive start control

Information Provided by:Provided Information

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 149 06 Starting and driving

Starting the vehicle with keyless drive*

Press the catch on the side of the start control (see the illustration). Pull the keyless drive start control out of the ignition switch. Insert the remote key into the ignition switch and turn it to position III to start the engine, page 147 for complete starting information.

Information Provided by:Provided Information

150 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 Starting and driving

Automatic transmission

Shiftgate positions Gear selector positions R – Reverse The car must be stationary when shifting to P – Park position R. Select the P position when starting or parking. In P, the transmission is mechanically blocked N – Neutral (Shiftlock). Always apply the parking brake N is the neutral position. The engine can be when parking. started, but no gear is selected. Apply the parking brake when the car is stationary with the gear selector in N.

NOTE If the gear selector is in the Neutral position and the vehicle has been at a standstill for at least 3 seconds, the brake pedal must be

G020237 pressed before the gear selector can be moved to another position. Depress the button on the front of the gear selector knob to move the selector between In order to move the gear selector to another the R, N, D, and P positions. position: The gear selector can be moved freely between 1. Turn the ignition key to position II (if the 06 the Geartronic (manual shifting) and Drive (D) G018264 engine is not already running). positions while driving. D - left position: automatic shifting, M - right posi- 2. Depress the brake pedal. tion: manual shifting 3. Move the gear selector to the desired posi- CAUTION tion. The car must be stationary when selecting D – Drive position P. D is the normal driving position. The Drive position offers 5 forward gears1. The car automatically shifts between the various forward gears,

1 T5 models have 6 forward gears. Information Provided by:Provided Information 151 06 Starting and driving

Automatic transmission

based on the level of acceleration and speed. time and will utilize the braking power of Kickdown will not occur if the driver attempts The car must be at a standstill when shifting to the engine. If the current speed is too high to use this function when engine speeds are position D from position R. for using a lower gear, the downshift will too high. The transmission will remain in the not occur until the speed has decreased currently selected gear. enough to allow the lower gear to be used. Manual shifting – Geartronic • If you slow to a very low speed, the trans- The manual shifting mode (Geartronic) can be mission will automatically shift down. selected at any time to manually select forward gears, including while the car is moving. Cold starts (turbo engines) NOTE When driving before the engine has reached its normal operating temperature, the transmis- Reverse, Neutral, and Park cannot be sion will shift up at slightly higher engine selected in Geartronic mode. speeds to heat the three-way catalytic converter as quickly as possible. • To access the Manual (M) shifting position from Drive (D), move the gear selector to the right to M. Kickdown • To return to the Drive (D) position from M, Automatic shift to a lower gear (kickdown) is move the gear selector to the left. achieved by depressing the accelerator pedal 06 fully and briskly. An upshift will occur when While driving approaching the top speed for a particular gear • If you select the M position while driving, or by releasing the accelerator pedal slightly. the gear that was being used in the Drive Kickdown can be used for maximum acceler- position will also initially be selected in the ation or when passing at highway speeds. M position. Safety function • Move the gear selector forward To help prevent excessive engine speeds (rpm) (toward "+") to shift to a higher gear or rearward (toward "–") to shift to a lower that could lead to engine damage, the engine gear. management system includes a function that prevents kickdown from taking place if the • If you hold the gear selector toward "–", the engine speed is too high. transmission will downshift one gear at a

Information Provided by:Provided Information 152 06 Starting and driving

Shiftlock override

Overriding the shiftlock system 4. Insert the key blade, see page 124, into the opening and press it down until it bottoms. 5. With the key blade pressed down, move the gear selector out of the P position. G018263

Shiftlock prevents the gear selector from being moved out of the P position unless the ignition key is in position II and the brake pedal is depressed. 06 In certain cases it may be necessary to move the gear selector from the P position manually. To manually override the Shiftlock system: 1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Depress the brake pedal. 3. There is a small cover below P-R-N-D on the gear selector panel. Open the rear edge of the panel.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 153 06 Starting and driving

Brake system

Brake lights WARNING WARNING The brake lights come on automatically when If the vehicle has been driven immedi- Use the jack intended for the vehicle the brakes are applied. • • ately prior to a brake pad inspection, the when changing a tire. For any other job, Adaptive brake lights wheel hub, brake components, etc., will use stands to support the vehicle. The adaptive brake lights activate in the event be very hot. Allow time for these com- • The jack should be kept well-greased ponents to cool before carrying out the of sudden braking or if the ABS system is acti- and clean, and should not be damaged. inspection. vated. This function causes an additional tail- • Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, non- light on each side of the vehicle to illuminate to • Apply the parking brake and put the slippery surface. gear selector in the Park (P) position. help alert vehicles traveling behind. • No objects should be placed between Block the wheels standing on the The adaptive brake lights activate if: • the base of jack and the ground, or ground, use rigid wooden blocks or between the jack and the attachment • The ABS system activates for more than large stones. bar on the vehicle. approximately a half second • The jack must correctly engage the jack • In the event of sudden braking while the attachment. vehicle is moving at speeds above approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) • Never allow any part of your body to be extended under a vehicle supported by When the vehicle has come to a stop, the brake a jack. lights and additional taillights remain on for as 06 long as the brake pedal is depressed or until braking force on the vehicle is reduced. Brake circuit malfunction The brake system is a hydraulic system con- Brake pad inspection sisting of two separate brake circuits. If a prob- On vehicles equipped with a jack*, the condi- lem should occur in one of these circuits, it is tion of the brake pads can be checked by rais- still possible to stop the vehicle with the other ing the vehicle (see page 199 for information brake circuit. about using the jack and removing a wheel) If the brake pedal must be depressed farther and performing a visual inspection of the brake than normal and requires greater foot pressure, pads. the stopping distance will be longer.

Information Provided by:Provided Information

154 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 Starting and driving

Brake system

A warning light in the instrument panel will light ple when towing your vehicle or if the engine is Anti-lock brakes (ABS) up to warn the driver that a fault has occurred. switched off when the vehicle is rolling. The The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) helps to brake pedal feels harder than usual. If this light comes on while driving or braking, improve vehicle control (stopping and steering) stop immediately and check the brake fluid during severe braking conditions by limiting level in the reservoir. Water on brake discs and brake pads brake lockup. When the system "senses" affects braking impending lockup, braking pressure is auto- NOTE Driving in rain and slush or passing through an matically modulated in order to help prevent lockup that could lead to a skid. Press the brake pedal hard and maintain automatic car wash can cause water to collect pressure on the pedal – do not pump the on the brake discs and pads. This will cause a The system performs a self-diagnostic test brakes. delay in braking effect when the pedal is when the engine is started and when the depressed. To avoid such a delay when the vehicle first reaches a speed of approxi- brakes are needed, depress the pedal occa- mately 12 mph (20 km/h). The brake pedal will WARNING sionally when driving through rain, slush, etc. pulsate several times and a sound may be If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in the This will remove the water from the brakes. audible from the ABS control module. This is reservoir or if a brake system message is Check that brake application feels normal. This normal. shown in the information display, DO NOT should also be done after washing or starting DRIVE. Have the vehicle towed to a Volvo in very damp or cold weather. For optimal ABS braking effect: retailer and have the brake system inspec- 1. Press down on the brake pedal with full ted. force. The pedal will pulsate. Severe strain on the brake system 06 The brakes will be subject to severe strain 2. Steer the vehicle in the direction of travel Power brakes function only when the when driving in mountains or hilly areas, or and keep the brake pedal depressed. engine is running when towing a trailer. Vehicle speed is usually Electronic Brake Force Distribution slower, which means that the cooling of the The power brakes utilize vacuum pressure (EBD) brakes is less efficient than when driving on which is only created when the engine is run- EBD is an integrated part of the ABS system. level roads. To reduce the strain on the brakes, ning. Never let the vehicle roll to a stop with the EBD regulates the hydraulic pressure to the shift into a lower gear and let the engine help engine switched off. rear brakes to help provide optimal braking with the braking. Do not forget that if you are If the power brakes are not working, consider- capacity. towing a trailer, the brakes will be subjected to ably higher pressure will be required on the a greater than normal load. The switching of the ABS modulator will be brake pedal to compensate for the lack of audible and the brake pedal will pulsate during power assistance. This can happen for exam-

Information Provided by:Provided Information 155 06 Starting and driving

Brake system

braking. Please be aware that ABS does not in order to utilize the system completely. EBA increase the absolute braking potential of the is automatically deactivated when the brake vehicle. While control will be enhanced, ABS pedal is released. will not shorten stopping distances on slippery surfaces. NOTE If the warning lamp lights up there is a mal- • When the EBA system is activated, the function of the ABS system (the standard brak- brake pedal will go down and pressure ing system will still function) and the vehicle in the brake system immediately increa- should be driven cautiously to a trained and ses to the maximum level. You must qualified Volvo service technician for inspec- maintain full pressure on the brake tion. pedal in order to utilize the system completely. There will be no braking effect if WARNING the pedal is released. EBA is automatically deactivated when the brake pedal If the BRAKES and ABS warning symbols is released. light at the same time, there may be a problem in the brake system. If the brake fluid • When the vehicle has been parked for level is normal in these circumstances, drive some time, the brake pedal may sink carefully to a trained and qualified Volvo more than usual when the engine is service technician to have the brake system started. This is normal and the pedal will 06 checked. return to its usual position when it is released. Emergency Brake Assistance – EBA EBA is designed to provide full brake effect immediately in the event of sudden, hard braking. The system is activated by the speed with which the brake pedal is depressed. When the EBA system is activated, the brake pedal will go down and pressure in the brake system immediately increases to the maximum level. Maintain full pressure on the brake pedal

Information Provided by:Provided Information 156 06 Starting and driving

Parking brake

Parking brake (hand brake) 4. If the vehicle rolls, the parking brake lever must be pulled more firmly. 5. When parking a vehicle always put the gear selector in P. Parking on a hill • If the vehicle is pointing uphill, turn the front wheels so that they point away from the curb. • If the vehicle is pointing downhill, turn the front wheels so that they point toward the curb. Releasing the parking brake

G026348 1. Press firmly on the brake pedal. 2. Pull the lever up slightly, press the button The parking brake lever is located between the at the end of the lever and lower the lever front seats. completely.

NOTE WARNING 06 The indicator light will illuminate even if the Pull up the parking brake lever up firmly to parking brake has only been partially its full extent. applied.

When applying the parking brake 1. Press firmly on the brake pedal. 2. Pull the parking brake lever up firmly to its full extent. 3. Release the brake pedal and ensure that the vehicle is at a standstill.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 157 06 Starting and driving

Stability system

Dynamic Stability Traction Control Temporarily switching off Spin control (DSTC) 1. Turn the thumbwheel (A) on the left-side The stability system consists of a number of steering wheel lever until the DSTC menu functions designed help reduce wheel spin, is displayed. counteract skidding, and to generally help 2. Hold down the RESET button (B) to toggle improve directional stability. between DSTC ON or DSTC SPIN A pulsating sound will be audible when the CONTROL OFF. system is actively operating and is normal. NOTE Traction control (TC) This function is designed to help reduce wheel • The message DSTC SPIN CONTROL spin by transferring power from a drive wheel OFF indicates that the stability sys- that begins to lose traction to the wheel on the tem's spin control function has tempo- G020349 opposite side of the vehicle (on the same axle). rarily been switched off. The spin control function is automati- TC is most active at low speeds. Thumb wheel • cally enabled each time the engine is This is one of the stability system's permanent RESET button started. functions and cannot be switched off. • DSTC ON indicates that all system Spin control (SC) functions are active. 06 The spin control function is designed to help prevent the drive wheels from spinning while the vehicle is accelerating. Active yaw control – AYC This function helps maintain directional stabil- Under certain circumstances, such as when ity, for example when cornering, by braking driving with snow chains, or driving in deep one or more of the wheels if the vehicle shows snow or loose sand, it may be advisable to a tendency to skid or slide laterally. temporarily switch off this function for maximum tractive force. This is one of the stability system's permanent functions and cannot be switched off.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 158 06 Starting and driving

Stability system

WARNING If the and symbols light up at the same time, read the message in the display. The car's handling and stability characteristics will be altered if the DSTC system func- If only the symbol lights up, this indicates tions have been disabled. one of the following situations: • The light illuminates for approximately DSTC-related messages in the text 2 seconds to indicate that the system is window performing a self-diagnostic test when the • "TRACTION CONTROL TEMPORARILY engine is started. OFF" – The system has been temporarily • If the light flashes while driving, this indi- switched off due to high brake temperature cates that the stability system is actively and will automatically switch on again functioning to help counteract wheel spin when the brakes have cooled. and/or a skid. • "ANTI-SKID SERVICE REQUIRED" – the • If this light stays on after the engine has system has been automatically disen- started or comes on while driving, there gaged due to a fault. A trained and qualified may be a fault in the stability system. Con- Volvo service technician retailer should sult a trained and qualified Volvo service check the system. technician. • If Spin control has been intentionally Symbols used by the stability system switched off, a message will be displayed. 06 Stability system indicator light WARNING The stability system is intended to help improve driving safety. It supplements, but can never replace, the driver's judgement Information symbol and responsibility when operating the vehicle. Speed and driving style should always be adapted to traffic and road conditions.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 159 06 Starting and driving

Towing

Towing the vehicle

The towing eyelet (1) is located in a bag that After the vehicle has been towed, the eyelet Towing a vehicle with all four wheels on is stowed in the ski hatch. should be removed and returned to the tool the ground bag. 06 Remove the cover over the opening for the towing eyelet on the front bumper by pry- WARNING WARNING ing open the lower edge with a coin, etc. Volvo does not recommend towing a disa- Remove the cover over the opening for the Do not use the towing eyelets to pull the bled vehicle behind another vehicle. Signif- icant difficulty in steering and braking, com- towing eyelet on the rear bumper by press- vehicle up onto a flat bed tow truck. bined with unfavorable weather, traffic, and ing the lower right corner of the cover. road conditions may make it impossible to Screw the towing eyelet in place first by maintain vehicle control. hand and then using the tire iron until it is securely in place. 1. Apply the parking brake.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 160 06 Starting and driving

Towing

2. Insert the key into the ignition to unlock the WARNING Towing vehicles with front wheel drive steering wheel. With the engine off and the Volvo recommends the use of flat bed equip- Never allow a vehicle to be towed with- vehicle at a standstill, great effort will be • ment for towing vehicles with front wheel drive. out a driver behind the wheel of the dis- required to turn the steering wheel. If wheel lift equipment must be used, please abled vehicle. 3. Turn the ignition key to position II. use extreme caution to help avoid damage to • When the engine is not running, steering the vehicle. 4. Place the gear selector in neutral. For vehi- resistance and the effort needed to cles with automatic transmissions, follow apply the brakes will be great. In this case, the vehicle should be towed with the rear wheels on the ground if at all possible. instruction on page 153, "Shiftlock over- • Never attempt to tow a vehicle with a ride" to allow the gear selector to be moved dead battery at night. If it is absolutely necessary to tow the vehicle from the Park position. with the front wheels on the ground, please refer to the towing information on the previous 5. Keep firm pressure on the brake pedal CAUTION while releasing the parking brake. page. • Check with state and local authorities • Sling-type equipment applied at the front 6. When towing has been completed, return before attempting this type of towing, the gear selector to Park and apply the will damage radiator and air conditioning as vehicles being towed are subject to lines. parking brake. regulations regarding maximum towing speed, length and type of towing • It is equally important not to use sling-type The following points should also be device, lighting, marker flags, etc. equipment at the rear or apply lifting equip- observed: ment inside the rear wheels; serious dam- • Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). Never • Never attempt to push- or tow-start a age to the rear axle may result. 06 vehicle with a dead battery. This would exceed local towing speed limits and heed • If the vehicle is being towed on a flat bed all local towing restrictions. inject unburned fuel into the three-way catalytic converter(s), causing over- truck, the towing eyelets must not be used • Never tow farther than 50 miles (80 km). heating, backfiring, and damage, see to secure the vehicle on the flat bed. Con- • Keep the tow rope taut at all times while the page 163 for instructions on jump star- sult the tow truck operator. vehicle is in motion. ting the vehicle. • The disabled vehicle should be towed in the forward direction only.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 161 06 Starting and driving

Towing

WARNING • Remember that the power brakes and power steering will not function when engine is not running. The braking and steering systems will function but considerably higher pressure will be required on the brake pedal and greater steering effort must be exerted. • The towing eyelets must not be used for pulling the vehicle out of a ditch or for any similar purpose involving severe strain. Do not use the towing eyelets to pull the vehicle up onto a flat bed tow truck.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 162 06 Starting and driving

Jump starting

Jump starting the vehicle your vehicle's battery (2), marked with a WARNING "+" sign. • Do not connect the jumper cable to any 3. Connect the auxiliary battery's negative (–) part of the fuel system or to any moving terminal (3) to the ground point in your parts. Avoid touching hot manifolds. vehicle's engine compartment near the Batteries generate hydrogen gas, which driver's side spring strut (4). • is flammable and explosive. 4. Start the engine in the assisting vehicle, • Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do then start the engine in the vehicle with not allow battery fluid to contact eyes, dead battery. skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If con- 5. After the engine has started, first remove tact occurs, flush the affected area the negative (–) terminal jumper cable. immediately with water. Obtain medical Then remove the positive (+) terminal help immediately if eyes are affected. jumper cable. • Never expose the battery to open flame or electric spark. WARNING • Do not smoke near the battery. Follow these instructions to jump start your Failure to follow the instructions for vehicle's dead battery or to jump start another PROPOSITION 65 WARNING! • jump starting can lead to personal vehicle's dead battery using your vehicle. If the Battery posts, terminals, and related acces- injury. 12-volt auxiliary battery to be used is in another sories contain lead and lead compounds, 06 vehicle, check that the vehicles are not touch- chemicals known to the state of California • Do not touch the jumper cables during ing to prevent premature completion of a cir- to cause cancer and reproductive harm. the attempt to start the vehicle. This Wash hands after handling. could cause sparks. cuit. Be sure to follow jump starting instructions provided for the other vehicle. To jump start your vehicle: 1. Switch off the ignition. 2. First connect the auxiliary battery positive (+) terminal (1) to the positive (+) terminal in

Information Provided by:Provided Information 163 06 Starting and driving

Towing a trailer

General information • Engine and transmission are subject to WARNING Volvo recommends the use of Volvo trailer increased loads. Therefore, engine coolant • Bumper-attached trailer hitches must hitches that are specially designed for the temperature should be closely watched • not be used on Volvos, nor should vehicle. when driving in hot climates or hilly terrain. Use a lower gear and turn off the air con- safety chains be attached to the Maximum trailer weights recommended by ditioner if the temperature gauge needle bumper. Volvo are: enters the red range. • Trailer hitches attaching to the vehicle's • Trailers without brakes: 1,540 lbs • If the automatic transmission begins to rear axle must not be used. (700 kg). overheat, a message will be displayed in • Never connect a trailer's hydraulic • Trailers with brakes: 2,000 lbs (900 kg) the information display. brake system directly to the vehicle Observe the legal requirements of the • Avoid overload and other abusive opera- brake system, nor a trailer's lighting state/province in which the vehicles are tion. system directly to the vehicle lighting registered. system. Consult your nearest trained Hauling a trailer affects handling, durabil- • and qualified Volvo service technician • The maximum recommended hitch ity, and economy. tongue load is 165 lbs (75 kg). for correct installation. It is necessary to balance trailer brakes • When towing a trailer, the trailer's safety • All Volvo models are equipped with with the towing vehicle brakes to provide a • wire must be correctly fastened to the energy-absorbing shock-mounted bump- safe stop (check and observe state/local hole or hook provided in the trailer hitch ers. Trailer hitch installation should not regulations). interfere with the proper operation of this on the vehicle. The safety wire should • Do not connect the trailer's brake system never be fastened to or wound around 06 bumper system. directly to the vehicle's brake system. the drawbar ball. Trailer towing does not normally present any • More frequent vehicle maintenance is particular problems, but take into considera- required. tion: • Remove the ball and drawbar assembly • Increase tire pressure to recommended when the hitch is not being used. full. See the chapter "Wheels and tires." • Volvo recommends the use of synthetic • When your vehicle is new, avoid towing engine oil when towing a trailer over long heavy trailers during the first 620 miles distances or in mountainous areas. (1,000 km). • Maximum speed when towing a trailer: 50 mph (80 km/h).

Information Provided by:Provided Information 164 06 Starting and driving

Towing a trailer

NOTE • When parking the vehicle with a trailer on a hill, apply the parking brake before putting the gear selector in Park (P). Always follow the trailer manufacturer's recommendations for wheel chocking. • If you use the manual (Geartronic) shift positions while towing a trailer, or if the vehicle is equipped with a manual transmission, make sure the gear you select does not put too much strain on the engine (using too high a gear). • The drawbar assembly/trailer hitch may be rated for trailers heavier than the vehicle is designed to tow. Please adhere to Volvo's recommended trailer weights. • Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines exceeding 15%. 06

Information Provided by:Provided Information 165 06 Starting and driving

Detachable trailer hitch

Installing the ball holder 4. Slide the locking bolt through the hitch assembly/ball holder. 5. Insert the cotter pin in the hole at the end of the locking bolt.

Removing the ball holder 1. Remove the cotter pin from the locking bolt and slide the locking bolt out of the ball holder/hitch assembly. 2. Pull the ball holder out of the hitch assembly.

NOTE G030864 A cover for the hitch assembly is also Ball holder included in the kit. Cotter pin

06 Hitch assembly Safety wire attachment Locking bolt 1. If necessary, remove the cotter pin from the locking bolt and slide the locking bolt out of the hitch assembly. 2. Slide the ball holder into the hitch assembly. 3. Align the hole in the ball holder with the one in the hitch assembly.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 166 06 Starting and driving

Transporting loads

Loading the vehicle WARNING Your vehicle's load-carrying capacity is affec- Remember that an object weighing ted by factors such as: • 44 lbs (20 kg) produces a force of • the number of passengers 2,200 lbs (1,000 kg) in a head-on colli- • tire inflation sion at 30 mph (50 km/h)! • the amount of optional or accessory equip- • When the rear backrest(s) are folded ment installed down, the vehicle should not be loaded to a level higher than 2 in. (5 cm) below • the amount of cargo. the upper edge of the rear side win- See the chapter "Wheels and tires" for more dows. Objects placed higher than this detailed information. level could impede the function of the Inflatable Curtain. Before loading the car, turn off the engine, and apply the parking brake when loading or unloading long objects. The gear selector can be inadvertently knocked out of position by long cargo, causing the car to move.

Keep the following in mind when loading the vehicle: 06 • Load objects in the trunk against the rear seat backrest. • Load heavy cargo as low as possible. • Center wide loads. • Secure all cargo with restraining straps anchored to the load securing eyelets. • Cover sharp edges on the load.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 167 06 Starting and driving

Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)*

Introduction WARNING • BLIS is an information system, NOT a warning or safety system. • BLIS does not eliminate the need for you to visually confirm the conditions around you, and the need for you to turn your head and shoulders to make sure that you can safely change lanes. • As the driver, you have full responsibility for changing lanes in a safe manner.

The system is based on digital camera technology. The cameras (1) are located beneath G020295 the side-view mirrors. A = approx. 10 ft. (3 meters), B = approx. 31 ft. (9.5 meters) BLIS camera When one (or both) of the cameras have detected a vehicle in the blind area (up to BLIS has an integrated function that alerts the Indicator light approximately 10 ft. (3 meters) from the side of driver if a fault should occur with the system. For example, if one or both of the system's BLIS symbol your vehicle, and up to approximately 31 ft. 06 (9.5 meters) behind the side-view mirror), the cameras are obscured, a message (see the The Blind Spot Information System (BLIS) is an indicator light in the door panel (2) illuminates. table on page 170) will appear in the informa- information system that indicates the presence The light will glow continuously to alert the tion display in the instrument panel. If this of another vehicle moving in the same direction driver of the vehicle in the blind area. occurs, clean the camera lenses. If necessary, as your vehicle in the side-view mirror's "blind the system can be temporarily switched off (for area". NOTE instructions see page 170). The door panel indicator light illuminates on CAUTION the side of the vehicle where the system has The BLIS system should only be repaired by detected another vehicle. If your vehicle is a trained and qualified Volvo service tech- passed on both sides at the same time, both nician. lights will illuminate.

Information Provided by:Provided Information

168 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 Starting and driving

Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)*

When does BLIS function Darkness NOTE The system functions when your vehicle is BLIS reacts to the headlights of surrounding vehicles. In order to be detected by BLIS, a If the BLIS indicator lights illuminate occa- moving at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h). sionally even when there are no other vehi- vehicle in the blind area must have its head- When you pass another vehicle: cles in the blind area, this does not indicate lights on. This means, for example, that the a fault in the system. The system reacts when you pass another system will not detect a trailer without head- vehicle at a speed of up to 6 mph (10 km/h) lights that is being towed behind a car or truck. In the event of a fault, Blind spot syst. Service required will be displayed. faster than that vehicle. WARNING When you are passed by another vehicle: The following are several examples of situa- The system reacts if your vehicle is passed by • BLIS does not react to cyclists or tions in which the BLIS indicator light(s) may another vehicle at a speed of up to 43 mph mopeds. illuminate even when there are no other vehi- (70 km/h) faster than your vehicle. • BLIS does not react to vehicles that are cles in the area monitored by the system. standing still. WARNING • The BLIS cameras have the same limi- tation as the human eye. In other words, BLIS does not function in sharp curves. • their "vision is impaired" by adverse • BLIS does not function when your vehi- weather conditions such as heavy cle is backing up. snowfall, intense light directly into the camera, dense fog, etc. • If you are towing a wide trailer, this may 06 prevent the BLIS cameras from detect- ing other vehicles in adjacent lanes. Limitations Light reflected from a wet road surface In certain situations, the BLIS indicator light(s) How BLIS functions in daylight and may illuminate even when there are no other darkness vehicles in the area monitored by the system. Daylight BLIS reacts to the shape of surrounding vehicles. The system is designed to help detect motor vehicles such as cars, trucks, buses, motorcycles, etc.

Information Provided by:Provided Information

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 169 06 Starting and driving

Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)*

CAUTION when the system is switched off, and a text message is displayed. Clean the lenses carefully to avoid • BLIS can be switched on again by pressing scratching. • the button. The indicator light in the button • The lenses are electrically heated to will illuminate and a new text message will help melt ice or snow. If necessary, gen- be displayed. Press the READ button, see

G018177 tly brush away snow from the lenses. page 61, to erase the message. The vehicle's own shadow against a large, light, BLIS system messages smooth surface such as barriers between lanes on Switching BLIS on and off a highway Text in the System status display BLIS SERVICE BLIS not functioning REQUIRED properly. Contact an authorized Volvo service technician.

BLIS CAMERA BLIS camera obscured. BLOCKED Clean the lenses. Sunlight directly in the camera when the sun is low 06 on the horizon BLIS ON BLIS system on Cleaning the BLIS camera lenses In order to function optimally, the BLIS camera

lenses must be kept clean. They can be wiped G018389 clean with a soft cloth or wet sponge. BLIS button (forward button in the illustration) BLIS is automatically activated when the ignition is switched on. The indicator lights will provide confirmation by flashing 3 times. • The system can be switched off by pressing the BLIS button in the center console. The indicator light in the button goes out

Information Provided by:Provided Information

170 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 Starting and driving

Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)*

Text in the System status display BLIS OFF BLIS system off

BLIS REDUCED The BLIS cameras' FUNCTION function has been reduced due to weak or impaired data transfer between the BLIS system's cameras and the vehicle's electrical system. The cameras will reset themselves when this data transfer has returned to normal.

Information Provided by:Provided Information

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 171 06 Starting and driving

Rear park assist*

Introduction Function Activating/deactivating park assist The system is activated automatically when the vehicle is started. The indicator light in the button in the center console illuminates. Park assist monitors the area behind the vehicle when the engine is running and reverse gear has been selected. The distance monitored behind the vehicle is approximately 5 ft (1.5 m). The signal comes from the rear speakers. The system must be deactivated when towing a trailer, carrying bicycles in a rear-mounted carrier, etc., which could trigger the rear park

assist system's sensors. G018389 Rear park assist Park Assist button (rear button in the illustration) NOTE The park assist system is designed to assist The system is activated automatically when the you when driving into parking spaces, garages, Rear park assist is deactivated automati- vehicle is started. cally when towing a trailer if Volvo genuine etc. It utilizes four ultrasound sensors located 06 trailer wiring is used. Press the Park assist button on the center in the rear bumper to measure the distance to console to temporarily deactivate the sys- a vehicle, object or a person who may be close tem. The indicator light in the button will go to the rear of your vehicle. out when the system has been deactivated. WARNING Park assist will be automatically reactiva- Park Assist is an information system, NOT a ted the next time the engine is started, or if safety system. This system is designed to the button is pressed (the indicator light in be a supplementary aid when parking the vehicle. It is not, however, intended to the button will illuminate). replace the driver's attention and judgement.

Information Provided by:Provided Information

172 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 Starting and driving

Rear park assist*

Audible signals from the park assist Cleaning the sensors system The Park Assist system uses an intermittent tone that pulses faster as you come close to an object, and becomes constant when you are within approximately 1 ft (30 cm) of an object behind the vehicle. If the volume of another source from the audio system is high, this will be automatically lowered.

Faults in the system If the information symbol illuminates and PARK ASSIST SERVICE REQUIRED is shown on the information display, this indicates that the system is not Park assist sensors functioning properly and has been disengaged. The sensors must be cleaned regularly to Consult a Volvo retailer or authorized Volvo ensure that they work properly. Clean them service technician. with water and a suitable car washing deter- 06 gent. CAUTION Ice and snow covering the sensors may cause In certain circumstances, the park assist incorrect warning signals. system may give unexpected warning signals that can be caused by external sound NOTE sources that use the same ultrasound frequencies as the system. This may include If the sensors are obstructed by e.g., dirt, such things as the horns of other vehicles, snow, or ice, this could result in false warn- wet tires on asphalt, pneumatic brakes, ing signals from the park assist system. motorcycle exhaust pipes, etc. This does not indicate a fault in the system.

Information Provided by:Provided Information

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 173 General information...... 176 Tire inflation...... 179 Inflation pressure ...... 181 Tire designations...... 182 Glossary of tire terminology...... 184 Vehicle loading...... 185 Uniform tire quality gradings...... 187 Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires...... 188 Tire Sealing System* ...... 189 Temporary spare...... 195 Spare tire and jack ...... 196 Wheel nuts...... 198 Changing a wheel...... 199 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)...... 201

Information Provided by:Provided Information

174 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. WHEELS AND TIRES

Information Provided by:Provided Information 07 Wheels and tires

General information

Introduction without the "all-season" rating. However, for Tire age Your vehicle is equipped with tires according optimum road holding on icy or snow-covered Tires degrade over time, even when they are to the vehicle's tire information placard on the roads, we recommend suitable winter tires on not being used. It is recommended that tires B-pillar (the structural member at the side of all four wheels. generally be replaced after 6 years of normal the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door When replacing tires, be sure that the new tires service. Heat caused by hot climates, frequent opening). are the same size designation, type (radial) and high loading conditions or Ultra Violet (U.V) preferably from the same manufacturer, on all exposure can accelerate the aging process. 1 CAUTION four wheels. Otherwise there is a risk of altering The temporary spare should also be replaced the car's roadholding and handling characte- at 6-year intervals, even if it has never been Some Volvo models are equipped with an used. Ultra High Performance tire and wheel com- ristics. bination designed to provide maximum dry A tire's age can be determined by the DOT pavement performance with consideration New Tires stamp on the sidewall (see the illustration). for hydroplaning resistance. They may be more susceptible to road hazard damage A tire with e.g., visible cracks or discoloration and, depending on driving conditions, may should be replaced immediately. achieve a tread life of less than 20,000 miles (30,000 km). Even if this vehicle is equipped Improving tire economy with Volvo’s advanced DSTC system, these • Maintain correct tire pressure. For the tire tires are not designed for winter driving, and pressure tables, see page 181. should be replaced with winter tires when Drive smoothly: avoid fast starts, hard weather conditions dictate. • braking and tire screeching. • Tire wear increases with speed. The tires have good road holding characteristics and offer good handling on dry and wet • Correct front wheel alignment is very important. 07 surfaces. It should be noted however that the tires have been developed to give these fea- Remember that tires are perishable goods. As • Unbalanced wheels impair tire economy tures on snow/ice-free surfaces. of 2000, the manufacturing week and year and driving comfort. (Department of Transportation (DOT) stamp) Most models are equipped with "all-season" • Tires must maintain the same direction of will be indicated with 4 digits (e.g., 1510 means rotation throughout their lifetime. tires, which provide a somewhat higher degree that the tire illustrated was manufactured dur- of road holding on slippery surfaces than tires ing week 15 of 2010).

1 Option or accessory on some models

Information Provided by:Provided Information 176 07 Wheels and tires

General information

• When replacing tires, the tires with the • Incorrectly mounted tires impair the car's WARNING most tread should be mounted on the rear braking properties and ability to force wheels to reduce the chance of oversteer aside rain, snow and slush. • The wheel and tire sizes for your Volvo are specified to meet stringent stability during hard braking. The tires with the most tread should always • and handling requirements. Unap- Hitting curbs or potholes can damage the be at the rear (to reduce the risk of skid- • proved wheel/tire size combinations tires and/or wheels permanently. ding). can negatively affect your vehicle's sta- Contact a Volvo workshop if you are Summer and winter tires • bility and handling. unsure about the tread depth. • Any damage caused by installation of Storing wheels and tires unapproved wheel/tire size combina- When storing complete wheels (tires mounted tions will not be covered by your new on rims), they should be suspended off the vehicle warranty. Volvo assumes no floor or placed on their sides on the floor. responsibility for death, injury, or expenses that may result from such Tires not mounted on rims should be stored on installations. their sides or standing upright, but should not be suspended. Tire wear CAUTION Tire rotation Tires should preferably be stored in a cool, Your vehicle has no required tire rotation. Tire dry, dark place, and should never be stored wear is affected by a number of factors such G020325 in close proximity to solvents, gasoline, oils, as tire inflation, ambient temperature, driving etc. The arrows shows the direction of rotation of the style, etc. tire 07 • When switching between summer and winter tires, mark the tires to indicate where they were mounted on the car, e.g., LF = left front, RR = right rear • Tires with tread designed to roll in only one direction are marked with an arrow on the sidewall.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 177 07 Wheels and tires

General information

NOTE Tread wear indicator • If the tires are rotated, they should only be moved from front to rear or vice versa. They should never be rotated left to right/right to left. • Ideally, tire rotation should be done the first time after approximately 3,000 miles (5,000 km) and thereafter at 6,000-mile (10,000-km) intervals. Some customers find that tire rotation may help to get extra mileage from tire life. • Tire rotation should only be performed if front/rear tire wear is fairly even and

tread height is above 1/16" (1.6 mm). G020323

Your Volvo retailer can also provide guidance The tires have wear indicator strips running based on your particular driving circumstan- across or parallel to the tread. The letters TWI ces. are printed on the side of the tire. When approximately 1/16" (1.6 mm) is left on the tread, these strips become visible and indicate that the tire should be replaced. Tires with less than 1/16" (1.6 mm) tread offer very poor traction. 07 When replacing worn tires, it is recommended that the tire be identical in type (radial) and size as the one being replaced. Using a tire of the same make (manufacturer) will prevent altera- tion of the driving characteristics of the vehicle.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 178 07 Wheels and tires

Tire inflation

Inflation placard NOTE your tire pressures frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure, which can be found on The placards shown indicate inflation pres- the vehicle's tire information placard or certifi- sure for the tires installed on the car at the cation label. factory only.

Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation pres- Checking tire pressure sure, including the spare, at least once a month Cold tires and before long trips. You are strongly urged Inflation pressure should be checked when the to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as auto- tires are cold. matic service station gauges may be inaccu- rate. The tires are considered to be cold when they have the same temperature as the sur- Use the recommended cold inflation pressure rounding (ambient) air. for optimum tire performance and wear.

G032513 Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause This temperature is normally reached after the uneven treadwear patterns. car has been parked for at least 3 hours. Tire inflation placard After driving a distance of approximately 1 mile Check tire inflation pressure regularly. WARNING (1.6 km), the tires are considered to be hot. If Tables listing the recommended inflation pres- • Under-inflation is the most common you have to drive farther than this distance to sure for your vehicle can be found beginning cause of tire failure and may result in pump your tire(s), check and record the tire on page 181. A tire inflation pressure placard severe tire cracking, tread separation, pressure first and add the appropriate air pres- is also located on the driver's side B-pillar (the or "blowout," with unexpected loss of sure when you get to the pump. structural member at the side of the vehicle, at vehicle control and increased risk of If checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, the rear of the driver's door opening). This plac- injury. never "bleed" or reduce air pressure. The tires 07 ard indicates the designation of the factory- • Under-inflated tires reduce the load car- are hot from driving and it is normal for pres- mounted tires on your vehicle, as well as load rying capacity of your vehicle. sures to increase above recommended cold limits and inflation pressure. pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended When weather temperature changes occur, tire cold inflation pressure could be significantly inflation pressures also change. A 10-degree under-inflated. temperature drop causes a corresponding drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check Information Provided by:Provided Information 179 07 Wheels and tires

Tire inflation

To check inflation pressure: Load ratings 1. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, See page 182 for an explanation of the load then firmly press the tire gauge onto the rating on the sidewall of the tire. valve. Speed ratings 2. Add air to reach the recommended air The speed ratings in the tables translate as fol- pressure lows: 3. Replace the valve cap. 4. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there Speed ratings are no nails or other objects embedded M 81 mph (130 km/h) that could puncture the tire and cause an air leak. Q 100 mph (160 km/h)

5. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are T 118 mph (190 km/h) no gouges, cuts, bulges or other irregular- ities. H 130 mph (210 km/h)

6. Repeat this procedure for each tire, includ- V 149 mph (240 km/h) ing the spare. W 168 mph (270 km/h) NOTE Y 186 mph (300 km/h) • If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure 07 with your tire gauge. • Some spare tires require higher inflation pressure than the other tires. Consult the tire inflation tables, see page 181, or see the inflation pressure placard.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 180 07 Wheels and tires

Inflation pressure

Tire inflation pressure table tion placard (see page 179 for its location) for The following tire pressures are recommended information specific to the tires installed on by Volvo for your vehicle. Refer to the tire infla- your vehicle at the factory.

Tire size Cold tire pressure up to four persons psi (kPa) Front Rear 235/45 R17 94V 36 (250) 36 (250)

235/40 R18 91V 36 (250) 36 (250)

Temporary spare tire 61 (420) 61 (420)

NOTE Please consult a Volvo retailer’s Parts department for the most up-to-date specifications.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 181 07 Wheels and tires

Tire designations

Tire designations 215: The width of the tire (in millimeters) M+S or M/S = Mud and Snow, AT = All from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. The Terrain, AS = All Season 7 9 larger the number, the wider the tire. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number 65: The ratio of the tire's height to its width (TIN): This begins with the letters "DOT" in percent. and indicates that the tire meets all federal 6 8 R: Radial tire. standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code where it was manufac- 5 10 15: The diameter of the wheel rim (in tured, the next two are the tire size code 4 11 inches). and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For exam- 3 95: The tire's load index. In this example, a 12 load index of 95 equals a maximum load of ple, 1510 means that the tire was manu- 2 1521 lbs (690 kg). factured during week 15 of 2010. The numbers in between are marketing codes used H: The tire's speed rating, or the maximum 1 at the manufacturer's discretion. This infor-

G026442 speed at which the tire is designed to be mation helps a tire manufacturer identify a driven for extended periods of time, carry- tire for safety recall purposes. Federal law mandates that tire manufacturers ing a permissible load for the vehicle, and Tire Ply Composition and Material place standardized information on the sidewall with correct inflation pressure. For exam- Used: Indicates the number of plies indi- of all tires (see the illustration). ple, H indicates a speed rating of 130 mph (210 km/h). cates or the number of layers of rubber- The following information is listed on the tire coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. sidewall: NOTE Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and the sidewall, The tire designation: The tire's load index and speed rating may which include steel, nylon, polyester, and not appear on the sidewall because they are others. 07 NOTE not required by law. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum Please be aware that the following tire des- load in pounds and kilograms that can be ignation is an example only and that this carried by the tire. Refer to the vehicle's tire particular tire may not be available on your information placard located on the B-Pillar vehicle. or the driver's door for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 182 07 Wheels and tires

Tire designations

Treadwear, Traction, and Temperature grades: See page 187 for more information. Maximum permissible inflation pressure: The greatest amount of air pressure that should ever be put in the tire. This limit is set by the tire manufacturer. The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such as standard load, radial tubeless, etc.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 183 07 Wheels and tires

Glossary of tire terminology

Terminology • B-pillar: The structural member at the side as the surrounding (ambient) air. This tem- • Tire information placard: A placard of the vehicle behind the front door. perature is normally reached after the car showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire • Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next has been parked for at least 3 hours. sizes, recommended inflation pressure, to the rim. Properly loading your vehicle will provide maxi- and the maximum weight the vehicle can • Sidewall of the tire: Area between the mum return of vehicle design performance. carry. bead area and the tread. • Tire Identification Number (TIN): A num- • Tread area of the tire: Area of the perim- ber on the sidewall of each tire providing eter of the tire that contacts the road when information about the tire brand and man- mounted on the vehicle. ufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacturer. • Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the • Inflation pressure: A measure of the tire beads are seated. amount of air in a tire. • Maximum load rating: a figure indicating • Standard load: A class of P-metric or Met- the maximum load in pounds and kilo- ric tires designed to carry a maximum load grams that can be carried by the tire. This at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. rating is established by the tire manufac- Increasing the inflation pressure beyond turer. this pressure will not increase the tires load carrying capability. • Maximum permissible inflation pressure: the greatest amount of air pressure • Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric that should ever be put in the tire. This limit tires designed to carry a heavier maximum is set by the tire manufacturer. load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing the inflation pressure • Recommended tire inflation pressure: inflation pressure, established by Volvo, 07 beyond this pressure will not increase the tires load carrying capability. which is based on the type of tires that are mounted on a vehicle at the factory. This • kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pres- information can be found on the tire infla- sure. tion placard(s) located on the driver's side • PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard B-pillar and in the tire inflation table in this unit of air pressure. chapter. • Cold tires: The tires are considered to be cold when they have the same temperature

Information Provided by:Provided Information 184 07 Wheels and tires

Vehicle loading

Loading the vehicle Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/ 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself CMVSS) label. The total load on each axle must and passengers from XXX kilograms or with the following terms for determining your never exceed its maximum permissible weight. XXX pounds. vehicle's weight ratings, with or without a Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 4. The resulting figure equals the available trailer, from the vehicle's Federal/Canadian The vehicle's curb weight + cargo + passen- amount of cargo and luggage load Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/ gers. capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount CMVSS) label, and the vehicle's tire informa- equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five tion placard: 150 lbs. passengers in your vehicle, the NOTE amount of available cargo and luggage Curb weight • The location of the various labels in your load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400–750 (5×150) The weight of the vehicle including a full tank vehicle can be found on page 270. = 650 lbs.) of fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or optional equip- • A table listing important weight limits for 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage your vehicle can be found on page ment. and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. 273. That weight may not safely exceed the Capacity weight available cargo and luggage load capacity All weight added to the curb weight, including calculated in Step 4. cargo and optional equipment. When towing, Steps for Determining Correct Load 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load trailer hitch tongue load is also part of cargo Limit 1. Locate the statement "the combined from your trailer will be transferred to your weight. 1 weight of occupants and cargo should vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and NOTE never exceed XXX pounds" on your vehicle's placard. luggage load capacity of your vehicle. For trailer towing information, please refer to the section "Towing a trailer", see 2. Determine the combined weight of the page 164. driver and passengers that will be riding in 07 your vehicle. Permissible axle weight The maximum allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These numbers are shown on the Federal/Canadian

1 See "Towing a trailer" Information Provided by:Provided Information 185 07 Wheels and tires

Vehicle loading

WARNING • Exceeding the permissible axle weight, gross vehicle weight, or any other weight rating limits can cause tire overheating resulting in permanent defor- mation or catastrophic failure. • Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the tires that were original equipment on the vehicle because this will lower the vehicle's GVW rating. Use only tires with the correct load carrying capacity. Consult your Volvo retailer for information.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 186 07 Wheels and tires

Uniform tire quality gradings

Uniform tire quality gradings faces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C WARNING ALL PASSENGER VEHICLE TIRES MUST may have poor traction performance. The trac- The temperature grade for this tire is estab- CONFORM TO FEDERAL SAFETY tion grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight-ahead) traction tests and is lished for a tire that is properly inflated and REQUIREMENTS IN ADDITION TO THESE not overloaded. Excessive speed, under- GRADES not a measure of cornering (turning) traction. inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat Quality grades can be found, where appli- WARNING buildup and tire failure. cable, on the tire sidewall between the tread shoulder and maximum section width. For The traction grade assigned to this tire is example: based on braking (straight-ahead) traction tests and is not a measure of cornering Treadwear 200 Traction AA (turning) traction. Temperature A TEMPERATURE TREADWEAR The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, The treadwear grade is a comparative rating and C, representing the tire's resistance to the based on the wear rate of the tire when tested generation of heat and its ability to dissipate under controlled conditions on a specified gov- heat when tested under controlled conditions ernment test course. For example, a tire gra- on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. ded 150 would wear one and one half (1 1/2) Sustained high temperature can cause the times as well on the government course as a material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire graded 100. The relative performance of tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to tires depends upon the actual conditions of sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds their use, however, and many depart signifi- to a minimum level of performance that all pas- cantly from the norm due to variation in driving senger vehicle tires must meet under the Fed- 07 habits, maintenance practices and differences eral Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B in road characteristics and climate. and A represent higher levels of performance TRACTION on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test sur-

Information Provided by:Provided Information 187 07 Wheels and tires

Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires

Snow chains CAUTION ure to do so could reduce traction to an Snow chains can be used on your Volvo with unsafe level or adversely affect handling. Check local regulations regarding the the following restrictions: • Do not mix tires of different design as this use of snow chains before installing. • could also negatively affect overall tire road Snow chains should be installed on front • • Always follow the chain manufacturer's grip. wheels only. Use only Volvo approved installation instructions carefully. Install Winter tires wear more quickly on dry roads snow chains. chains as tightly as possible and • in warm weather. They should be removed If accessory, aftermarket or "custom" tires retighten periodically. • when the winter driving season has ended. and wheels are installed and are of a size Never exceed the chain manufacturer's • Studded tires should be run-in different than the original tires and wheels, specified maximum speed limit. (Under • 300–600 miles (500–1000 km) during chains in some cases CANNOT be used. no circumstances should you exceed which the car should be driven as smoothly Sufficient clearances between chains and 31 mph (50 km/h). brakes, suspension and body components as possible to give the studs the opportu- must be maintained. • Avoid bumps, holes or sharp turns nity to seat properly in the tires. The tires when driving with snow chains. should have the same rotational direction Some strap-on type chains will interfere • throughout their entire lifetime. with brake components and therefore • The handling of the vehicle can be CANNOT be used. adversely affected when driving with chains. Avoid fast or sharp turns as well NOTE • Certain size tires may not allow the assem- as locked wheel braking. bly of snow chains/traction devices. Please consult state or provincial regulations restricting the use of studded winter Consult your Volvo retailer for additional snow tires before installing such tires. chain information. Snow tires, studded tires Tires for winter use: • Owners who live in or regularly commute 07 through areas with sustained periods of snow or icy driving conditions are strongly advised to fit suitable winter tires to help retain the highest degree of traction. • It is important to install winter tires on all four wheels to help retain traction during cornering, braking, and accelerating. Fail-

Information Provided by:Provided Information 188 07 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System*

Introduction Accessing the tire sealing system WARNING The tire sealing system is stowed in the compartment in the rear side of the ski hatch in the • After using the tire sealing system, the center of the rear seat backrest. See page vehicle should not be driven farther than approximately 120 miles (200 km). 119 for information on opening this hatch. • Have the tire inspected by a trained and 1. Lift the floor hatch in the trunk. qualified Volvo service technician as 2. Lift out the tire sealing system. soon as possible to determine if it can be permanently repaired or must be NOTE replaced. • The tire sealing system is only intended • The vehicle should not be driven faster to seal holes on the tire’s tread area, not than 50 mph (80 km/h) while using a tire the sidewall. that has been temporarily repaired with the tire sealing system. • Tires with large holes or tears cannot be repaired with the tire sealing system. • After using the tire sealing system, drive carefully and avoid abrupt steering Location of the tire sealing system • After use, stow the tire sealing system maneuvers and sudden stops. Certain models are equipped with a tire sealing properly to help prevent rattling. system1 that enables you to temporarily seal a hole in the tread surface and re-inflate a flat tire, or to adjust a tire’s inflation pressure. The system consists of an air compressor, a container for the sealing compound, wiring to connect the system to the vehicle’s electrical 07 system via one of the 12-volt sockets, and a hose used to connect the system to the tire’s inflation valve. The 12-volt socket is located in the front tunnel console.

1 Not available on all models or in all markets Information Provided by:Provided Information

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 189 07 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System*

Tire sealing system–overview WARNING • Inhalation: Move the person to fresh air. If irritation persists, get medical atten- Please keep the following points in mind tion. when using the tire sealing system: • The sealing compound bottle (no. 8 in the illustration) contains 1.2-Ethanol NOTE and natural rubber-latex. These sub- Do not break the seal on the bottle. This stances are harmful if swallowed. occurs automatically when the bottle is • The contents of this bottle may cause screwed into the holder. allergic skin reactions or otherwise be potentially harmful to the skin, the central nervous system, and the eyes. Tire sealing system–temporarily repairing a flat tire Precautions: • Keep out of reach of children. G020400 • Do not ingest the contents. Speed limit sticker • Avoid prolonged or repeated contact with the skin. On/Off switch • Hands should be washed thoroughly Electrical wire after handling. Bottle holder (orange cover) First aid: • Skin: Wash affected areas of skin with Protective hose cover soap and water. Get medical attention 07 Air release knob if symptoms occur. • Eyes: Flush with plenty of water for least Hose 15 minutes, occasionally lifting the G019723 Bottle with sealing compound upper and lower eyelids. Get medical attention if symptoms occur. Temporarily repairing a flat tire is done in two Air pressure gauge stages: • Stage 1: The hole is sealed by pumping sealing compound into the tire. The car is

Information Provided by:Provided Information

190 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 07 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System*

then driven a short distance to distribute 3. Ensure that the on/off switch is in posi- WARNING the sealing compound in the tire. tion 0 (the 0 side of the switch should be pressed down). The bottle is equipped with a catch to keep it securely in place and help prevent sealing NOTE 4. Put on the gloves included in the tire seal- compound leakage. Once in place, the bot- Do not remove any foreign objects (nails, ing system. tle cannot be unscrewed. This must be done etc.) from the tire before using the sealing by a trained and qualified Volvo service system. WARNING technician.

Contact with the sealing compound may 7. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s infla- • Stage 2: The tire’s inflation pressure is cause skin irritation. If contact occurs, wash checked and adjusted if necessary. the affected area immediately with soap and tion valve and screw the tire sealing sys- water. tem’s hose connector onto the valve as WARNING tightly as possible by hand. • Never leave the tire sealing system 5. Unscrew the orange cover over the bottle 8. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest unattended when it is operating. holder and unscrew the cap on the bottle 12-volt socket in the vehicle. • Keep the tire sealing system away from of sealing compound. 9. Start the vehicle’s engine. children. NOTE 10. Start the tire sealing system’s compressor • Be sure the vehicle is parked safely off by pressing the on/off switch to position I. the road and away from moving traffic. Do not break the seal on the bottle. This • Apply the parking brake. occurs automatically when the bottle is screwed into the holder.

Stage 1: Sealing the hole 6. Screw the bottle into the bottle holder. 1. Open the cover on the tire sealing kit. 07 2. Peel off the speed limit sticker and affix it to the steering wheel hub where it will be clearly visible to the driver.

Information Provided by:Provided Information

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 191 07 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System*

WARNING CAUTION CAUTION • Never stand next to the tire being inflated The compressor should not be used for If your vehicle is equipped with the Tire when the compressor is in operation. more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), the overheating. use of the sealing compound may lead to • If cracks, bubbles, etc. form on the tire, incorrect tire pressure readings or in rare switch off the compressor immediately. cases, damage to the tire pressure sensor. • If there is visible damage to the sidewall WARNING Use the tire sealing system to check and adjust the damaged tire's inflation pressure. or the rim, the tire cannot be repaired. If the pressure remains below 22 psi The vehicle should not be driven if this (1.8 bar) after approximately seven minutes, occurs. Contact a towing service or turn off the compressor. In this case, the NOTE Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance if hole is too large to be sealed and the vehicle applicable. should not be driven. • Safely stow the tire sealing system in a convenient place as it will soon be used again to check the tire’s inflation pres- NOTE 12. Switch off the compressor and disconnect the electrical wire from the 12-volt socket. sure. The air pressure gauge will temporarily • The empty bottle of sealing compound show an increase in pressure to approxi- 13. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflation cannot be removed from the bottle mately 88 psi (6 bar) while the sealing com- valve and reinstall the valve cap. holder. Consult a trained and qualified pound is being pumped into the tire. The Volvo service technician to have the pressure should return to a normal level 14. Immediately drive the vehicle for approxi- bottle removed and properly disposed after approximately 30 seconds. mately 2 miles (3 km) at a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) to distribute the seal- of. ing compound in the tire. 11. Within seven minutes, inflate the tire to between 22—44 psi (1.8—3.0 bar). Switch 07 off the compressor briefly to get a clear reading from the pressure gauge.

Information Provided by:Provided Information

192 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 07 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System*

WARNING Replacing the sealing compound Inflating tires container The tire sealing system can be used to inflate If heavy vibrations, unsteady steering behavior, or noises should occur while driv- The sealing compound container must be the tires. To do so: replaced if: ing, reduce speed and park the vehicle in a 1. Park the car in a safe place. safe place. Recheck the tire for bumps, the tire sealing system has been used to • 2. The compressor should be switched off. cracks, or other visible damage, and repair a tire recheck its inflation pressure. If the pressure Ensure that the on/off switch is in posi- is below 19 psi (1.3 bar), do not continue • the container’s expiration date has passed tion 0 (the 0 side of the switch should be driving. Have the vehicle towed to a trained (see the date on decal). pressed down). and qualified Volvo service technician. NOTE 3. Take out the electrical wire and hose. Stage 2: Checking inflation pressure • After use, the sealing compound bottle, 4. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s infla- 1. Connect the tire sealing system as descri- the hose, and certain other system tion valve and screw the hose connector bed in stage 1. components must be replaced. Please onto the valve as tightly as possible by hand. 2. Refer to the inflation pressure tables for the consult your Volvo retailer for replacement parts. correct inflation pressure. If the tire needs 5. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest to be inflated, start the tire sealing system’s • If the sealing compound bottle’s expi- 12-volt socket in the vehicle. ration date has passed, please take it to compressor. If necessary, release air from 6. Start the vehicle’s engine. the tire by turning the air release knob a Volvo retailer or a recycling station counterclockwise. that can properly dispose of harmful substances. WARNING CAUTION • The vehicle’s engine should be running when the tire sealing system is used to The compressor should not be used for avoid battery drain. Therefore, be sure 07 more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid the vehicle is parked in a well ventilated overheating. place, or outdoors, before using the system. WARNING • Children should never be left unattended in the vehicle when the engine is running. If you interrupt your trip for more than 1 hour, check the inflation pressure in the damaged tire again before continuing.

Information Provided by:Provided Information

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 193 07 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System*

7. Check the tire’s inflation pressure on the gauge. Switch off the compressor briefly to get a clear reading from the pressure gauge. 8. Refer to the tire inflation tables for the correct inflation pressure. If the tire needs to be inflated, start the tire sealing system’s compressor (press the on/off switch to position I). If necessary, release air from the tire by turning the air release knob counterclockwise.

CAUTION The compressor should not be used for more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid overheating.

9. Turn off the compressor (press the on/off switch to position 0) when the correct inflation pressure has been reached. 10. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflation valve and reinstall the valve cap. 07 11. Disconnect the electrical wire from the 12-volt socket.

Information Provided by:Provided Information

194 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 07 Wheels and tires

Temporary spare

Temporary spare The spare tire in your vehicle1 is called a "Tem- porary Spare". Recommended tire pressure (see the placard on the B-pillar or on the fuel filler door) should be maintained irrespective of which position on the car the temporary spare tire is used. In the event of damage to this tire, a new one can be purchased from your Volvo retailer.

WARNING Current legislation prohibits the use of the "Temporary Spare" tire other than as a temporary replacement for a punctured tire. It must be replaced as soon as possible by a standard tire. Road holding and handling may be affected with the "Temporary Spare" in use. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) with the "Temporary Spare" in use.

CAUTION The car must not be driven with wheels of 07 different dimensions or with a spare tire other than the one that came with the car. The use of different size wheels can seriously damage your car's transmission.

1 Not on models equipped with the Tire sealing system.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 195 07 Wheels and tires

Spare tire and jack

Accessing the spare tire1 and jack

Spare tire and tools (the tools are located in the same place on models with the Tire Sealing System) The spare tire is located in a storage compart- 3. Open the zipper on the bag and lift out the ment under the floor of the trunk. There is a Styrofoam block holding the jack and black Styrofoam block in the center of the tools. wheel rim containing the jack and tools. The 4. Lift the spare tire out of the bag. bag's straps are attached to two eyelets on the floor of the spare tire compartment. 07 Taking out the spare tire 1. Lift the rear edge of the floor in the trunk. 2. Release the two straps holding the bag in place in the spare tire compartment.

1 Only on models not equipped with the Tire Sealing System

Information Provided by:Provided Information 196 07 Wheels and tires

Spare tire and jack

Returning the jack, tools and spare tire important information in the following to their storage compartment warning.

WARNING The bag holding the spare tire is part of the vehicle's collision protection. When the spare tire is stored in the vehicle, it should always be kept in this bag. The bag should always be anchored to the two eyelets under the floor of the trunk, with the textile label upward and the arrow (see the illustration) pointing forward in the vehicle.

WARNING The jack and any tools should always be returned to their proper storage compartments after use to help keep them securely 1. Crank down the jack so that it fits into its in place in the event of sudden braking, etc. storage position in the Styrofoam block. 2. Return the lug wrench to its proper position in the Styrofoam block. 3. Fold the crank and return the jack to its proper position in the Styrofoam block. 07 4. Place the Styrofoam block in the center of the wheel rim and put the wheel into the bag. 5. When returning the bag to the storage compartment, it must be securely fastened with the arrow pointing forward. See the

Information Provided by:Provided Information 197 07 Wheels and tires

Wheel nuts

Wheel nuts Steel rims – type 1 wheel nuts Steel rims are normally secured using type 1 wheel nuts, although these rims may also be secured with type 2 nuts.

WARNING Never use type 1 wheel nuts for aluminum wheels. This could cause the wheel to come loose.

Aluminum wheels – type 2 wheel nuts Only type 2 wheel nuts can be used for aluminum wheels.

NOTE Low nut These nuts can also be used on steel High nut wheels. Three different types of wheel nuts may be used on your vehicle, depending on whether Lockable wheel nut the wheels are steel or aluminum. If steel wheels with lockable wheel nuts are used in combination with wheel covers, the Tightening torques: lockable wheel nut must be fitted to the stud 07 • Type 1 wheel nuts: 81 ft. lbs. (110 Nm) nearest the air valve. The wheel cover cannot otherwise be installed on the wheel. • Type 2 wheel nuts: 96 ft. lbs. (130 Nm) • Lockable wheel nuts: 81 ft. lbs. (110 Nm)

Information Provided by:Provided Information 198 07 Wheels and tires

Changing a wheel

Removing the wheel 6. There are two jack attachment points on WARNING See page 196 for information on accessing the each side of the car. Position the jack cor- The jack must correctly engage the jack jack and tools for changing a wheel. rectly in the attachment (see the illustration) • and crank while simultaneously guiding the attachment. 1. Apply the parking brake. base of the jack to the ground. The base of • Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, non- 2. Put the gear selector in Park (P). the jack must be flat on a level, firm, non- slippery surface. slippery surface. Before raising the car, 3. Block the wheels that are on the ground • Never allow any part of your body to be check that the jack is still correctly posi- extended under a car supported by a with wooden blocks or large stones. tioned in the attachment. jack. 4. Remove the wheel cover (where applica- • Use the jack intended for the car when ble) using the flat end of the lug wrench. changing a tire. For any other job, use stands to support the car. • Apply the parking brake and put the gear selector in the Park (P) position. • Block the wheels standing on the ground, use rigid wooden blocks or large stones. • The jack should be kept well-greased and clean, and should not be damaged. • No objects should be placed between the base of jack and the ground, or between the jack and the attachment bar on the vehicle.

Jack attachment points 07 G020332 7. Raise the vehicle until the wheel to be Lug wrench with telescoping handle changed is off the ground. 5. With the vehicle still on the ground, use the 8. Unscrew the wheel nuts completely and lug wrench to loosen the wheel nuts ½–1 carefully remove the wheel so as not to turn by exerting downward pressure. Turn damage the threads on the wheel bolts. the nuts counterclockwise to loosen.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 199 07 Wheels and tires

Changing a wheel

Installing the wheel 1. Clean the contact surfaces between the wheel and hub. 2. Lift the wheel and place it on the hub. 3. Install the wheel nuts and hand-tighten them. Using the lug wrench, tighten crosswise until all nuts are snug. 4. Lower the vehicle to the ground and alter- nately tighten the bolts crosswise to 81 ft. lbs. (110 Nm) or 96 ft. lbs. (130 Nm), depending on the type of wheel/wheel nuts used on your vehicle. See also 198 for additional information. 5. Install the wheel cover (where applicable). See page 196 for information on returning the jack and tools to their proper storage positions. On vehicles equipped with the tire sealing system, the jack should be cranked down as far as possible and returned to its storage position in the foam block.

07 WARNING The jack and any tools should always be returned to their proper storage compartments after use to help keep them securely in place in the event of sudden braking, etc.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 200 07 Wheels and tires

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Introduction NOTE Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute 1 for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv- The tire pressure monitoring system uses sen- If a fault occurs in TPMS, the tire pressure sors mounted in the tire valves to check infla- er's responsibility to maintain correct tire pres- warning light will flash for approximately sure, even if under-inflation has not reached tion pressure levels. When the vehicle is mov- 1 minute and TIRE PRESS SYST the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low ing at a speed of approximately 20 mph SERVICE REQUIRED will be displayed. (30 km/h) or faster, these sensors transmit tire pressure telltale. inflation pressure data to a receiver located in Each tire, including the spare (if provided), Your vehicle has also been equipped with a the vehicle. should be checked monthly when cold and TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when inflated to the inflation pressure recommended the system is not operating properly. The NOTE by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale . When the system USA – FCC ID: KR5S122780002 placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for This device complies with part 15 of the indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation approximately one minute and then remain FCC rules. Operation is subject to the fol- continuously illuminated. This sequence will lowing conditions: (1) This device may not pressure label, you should determine the continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as cause harmful interference, and (2) this proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) device must accept any interference long as the malfunction exists. When the mal- As an added safety feature, your vehicle has received, including interference that may function indicator is illuminated, the system cause undesired operation. been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring may not be able to detect or signal low tire system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres- pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may sure telltale when one or more of your tires is occur for a variety of reasons, including the When low inflation pressure is detected, TPMS significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when installation of replacement or alternate tires or will light up the tire pressure warning light the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS (also referred to as a telltale) in the instrument should stop and check your tires as soon as from functioning properly. Always check the panel and will display one of the following mes- possible, and inflate them to the proper pres- TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one 07 sages in the text window: LOW TIRE PRESS. sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to CHECK TIRES or VERY LOW TIRE tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires PRESSURE. tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the function properly. vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

1 This system is standard on U.S. models and optional on Canadian models Information Provided by:Provided Information 201 07 Wheels and tires

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

NOTE will erase the warning text and the warning Volvo does not recommend moving sen- light will go out. sors back and forth between sets of • TPMS indicates low tire pressure but wheels. does not replace normal tire mainte- WARNING nance. For information on correct tire NOTE pressure, please refer to the tables Incorrect inflation pressure could lead to tire beginning on page 181, or consult your failure, resulting in a loss of control of the • If you change to tires with a different Volvo retailer. vehicle. recommended inflation pressure, the • The tire pressure warning light will not TPMS system must be recalibrated to identify which tire is underinflated. Be Changing wheels with TPMS these tires. This must be done by an authorized Volvo retailer or workshop. sure to check all four tires. Please note the following when changing or • A certain amount of air seepage from replacing the factory installed TPMS wheels/ • If a tire is changed, or if the TPMS sen- the tires occurs naturally and tire pres- tires on the vehicle: sor is moved to another wheel, the sen- sure fluctuates with seasonal changes sor's seal, nut, and valve core should be • Only the factory-mounted wheels are replaced. in temperature. Always check tire pres- equipped with TPMS sensors in the valves. sure regularly. • When installing TPMS sensors, the • If the vehicle is equipped with a temporary vehicle must be parked for at least spare tire, this tire does not have a TPMS 15 minutes with the ignition off. If the Erasing warning messages sensor. vehicle is driven within 15 minutes, a When a low tire pressure warning message has • If wheels without TPMS sensors are moun- TPMS error message will be displayed. been displayed, and the tire pressure warning ted on the vehicle, TIRE PRESS SYST light has come on: SERVICE REQUIRED will be displayed CAUTION 1. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the each time the vehicle is driven above inflation pressure of all four tires. 25 mph (40 km/h) for 10 minutes or more. When inflating tires with TPMS valves, press the pump's mouthpiece straight onto the 07 2. Re-inflate the tire(s) to the correct pressure • Once TPMS sensors are properly installed, the warning message should not reappear. valve to help avoid bending or otherwise (consult the tire pressure placard or the If the message is still displayed, drive the damaging the valve. tables, see page 181 ). vehicle for several minutes at a speed of 3. In certain cases, it may be necessary to 20 mph (30 km/h) or faster to erase the Recalibrating TPMS (Canadian models drive the vehicle for several minutes at a message. only) speed of 20 mph (30 km/h) or faster. This • Volvo recommends that TPMS sensors be In certain cases, it may be necessary to reca- fitted on all wheels used on the vehicle. librate TPMS to conform to Volvo's recom-

Information Provided by:Provided Information 202 07 Wheels and tires

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) mended tire inflation pressures (see the inflation pressure table on page 181), for example, if higher inflation pressure is necessary when transporting heavy loads, etc. To recalibrate: 1. Switch off the engine. 2. Inflate the tires to the desired pressure and turn the ignition key to position I or II (see page 146 for additional information). 3. Turn the thumb wheel on the left-side steering wheel lever until Tire pressure Calibration appears in the display. 4. Press and hold the Reset button on the left-side steering wheel lever until TIRE PRESSURE CALIBRATED is displayed. Activating/deactivating TPMS (Canadian models only) 1. Switch off the engine. 2. Turn the ignition key to position I or II. 3. Press and hold the Reset button on the left-side steering wheel lever until TIRE 07 PRESS SYST OFF is displayed. Repeat steps 1-3 to turn TPMS on again.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 203 Washing and cleaning the car...... 206 Paint touch up...... 210

Information Provided by:Provided Information 204 CAR CARE

Information Provided by:Provided Information 08 Car care

Washing and cleaning the car

Washing the car considerably and also helps prolong the CAUTION The following points should be kept in mind service life of the wiper blades. Avoid waxing or polishing plastic or rub- when washing and cleaning the car: Wash off the dirt from the underside (wheel • • ber components housings, fenders, etc). • The car should be washed at regular inter- Polishing chromed strips can wear In areas of high industrial fallout, more fre- • vals since dirt, dust, insects and tar spots • away or damage the surface adhere to the paint and may cause dam- quent washing is recommended. age. To help prevent corrosion, it is partic- • Polishes containing abrasive sub- ularly important to wash the car frequently NOTE stances should not be used in the wintertime when salt has been used When washing the car, remember to remove on the roads. dirt from the drain holes in the doors and CAUTION • Avoid washing your car in direct sunlight. sills. Doing so may cause detergents and wax • During high pressure washing, the to dry out and become abrasive. To avoid spray mouthpiece must never be closer scratching, use lukewarm water to soften Exterior components to the vehicle than 13" (30 cm). Do not the dirt before you wash with a soft Volvo recommends the use of special cleaning spray into the locks. sponge, and plenty of sudsy water. products, available at your Volvo retailer, for • Dirt, snow, etc., on the headlights can cleaning colored plastic, rubber, or ornamental reduce lighting capacity considerably. • Bird droppings: Remove from paintwork components such as chromed strips on the as soon as possible. Otherwise the finish Clean the headlights regularly, for exterior of your vehicle. The instructions for may be permanently damaged. example when refueling. using these products should be followed care- • A detergent can be used to facilitate the fully. Solvents or stain removers should not be softening of dirt and oil. used. Automatic washing – simple and quick • Dry the car with a clean chamois and We do NOT recommend washing your car in an remember to clean the drain holes in the automatic wash during the first few months doors and rocker panels. (because the paint will not have hardened suf- • Tar spots can be removed with tar remover ficiently). after the car has been washed. An automatic wash is a simple and quick way • A stiff-bristle brush and lukewarm soapy to clean your car, but it is worth remembering 08 water can be used to clean the wiper that it may not be as thorough as when you blades. Frequent cleaning of the wind- yourself go over the car with sponge and water. shield and wiper blades improves visibility Keeping the underbody clean is most impor-

Information Provided by:Provided Information 206 08 Car care

Washing and cleaning the car tant, especially in the winter. Some automatic Exterior lighting CAUTION washers do not have facilities for washing the Condensation may form temporarily on the underbody. inside of the lenses of exterior lights such as Volvo does not recommend the use of long- life or durable paint protection coatings, headlights, fog lights, or taillights. This is nor- some of which may claim to prevent pitting, CAUTION mal and the lights are designed to withstand fading, oxidation, etc. These coatings have moisture. Normally, condensation will dissi- Before driving into an automatic car not been tested by Volvo for compatibility • pate after the lights have been on for a short with your vehicle's clear coat. Some of them wash, turn off the optional rain sensor to time. may cause the clear coat to soften, crack, avoid damaging the windshield wipers. or cloud. Damage caused by application of • Make sure that side view mirrors, auxil- Polishing and Waxing paint protection coatings may not be cov- iary lamps, etc, are secure, and that any • Normally, polishing is not required during ered under your vehicle's paint warranty. antenna(s) are retracted or removed. the first year after delivery, however, wax- Otherwise there is risk of the machine ing may be beneficial. Upholstery care dislodging them • Before applying polish or wax the vehicle • Chromed wheels: Clean chrome- must be washed and dried. Tar spots can Fabric plated wheels using the same deter- be removed with kerosene or tar remover. Clean with soapy water or a detergent. For gents used for the body of the vehicle. Difficult spots may require a fine rubbing more difficult spots caused by oil, ice cream, Aggressive wheel-cleaning agents can compound. shoe polish, grease, etc., use a clothing/fabric permanently stain chrome-plated • After polishing use liquid or paste wax. stain remover. Consult your Volvo retailer. wheels. • Several commercially available products contain both polish and wax. Interior plastic components Cleaning interior plastic components should WARNING Waxing alone does not substitute for pol- • be done with a cleaning agent specially ishing a dull surface. • When the car is driven immediately after designed for this purpose. Consult your Volvo being washed, apply the brakes several • A wide range of polymer-based waxes can retailer. times in order to remove any moisture be purchased today. These waxes are easy from the brake linings. to use and produce a long-lasting, high- Alcantera™ suede-like material • Engine cleaning agents should not be gloss finish that protects the bodywork Suede-like upholstery can be cleaned with a against oxidation, road dirt and fading. soft cloth and mild soap solution. used when the engine is warm. This 08 constitutes a fire risk. • Do not polish or wax your vehicle in direct sunlight (the surface of the vehicle should not be warmer than 113 °F (45 °C).

Information Provided by:Provided Information 207 08 Car care

Washing and cleaning the car

Leather care 3. Dampen the stain thoroughly with the CAUTION Volvo's leather upholstery is manufactured sponge. Let the sponge absorb the stain, with a protectant to repel soiling. Over time, do not rub. • Under no circumstances should gaso- sunlight, grease and dirt can break down the line, naphtha or similar cleaning agents 4. Dry the stain with soft paper towels or a be used on the plastic or the leather protection. Staining, cracking, scuffing, and towel, and allow the leather to dry com- since these can cause damage. fading can result. pletely. • Take extra care when removing stains Volvo offers an easy-to-use, non-greasy Protecting leather upholstery such as ink or lipstick since the coloring leather care kit formulated to clean and beau- 1. Put a small amount of protectant cream on can spread. tify your vehicle's leather, and to renew the a cloth and apply a thin coating of cream Use solvents sparingly. Too much sol- protective qualities of its finish. The cleaner • to the upholstery with light circular move- vent can damage the seat padding. removes dirt and oil buildup. The light cream ments. protectant restores a barrier against soil and • Start from the outside of the stain and sunlight. 2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes. work toward the center. Sharp objects (e.g. pencils or pens in a Volvo also offers a special leather softener that This will help the leather resist staining and • pocket) or Velcro fasteners on clothing should be applied after the cleaner and pro- protect against sunlight's harmful UV rays. may damage the textile upholstery. tectant. It leaves leather soft and smooth, and reduces friction between leather and other fin- • Clothing that is not colorfast, such as ishes in the vehicle. new jeans or suede garments, may stain the upholstery. Volvo recommends cleaning, protecting and conditioning your vehicle's leather two to four times a year. Ask your Volvo retailer about Cleaning the seat belts Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and Leather Soft- Clean only with lukewarm water and a mild ener 943 7429. soap solution. Cleaning leather upholstery 1. Pour leather cleaner on a damp sponge and squeeze it until the cleaner foams. 08 2. Apply the foam to the stain by moving the sponge with circular movements.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 208 08 Car care

Washing and cleaning the car

Cleaning floor mats The floor mats should be vacuumed or brushed clean regularly, especially during winter when they should be taken out for drying. Spots on textile mats can be removed with a mild detergent. For best protection in winter, Volvo recommends the use of Volvo rubber floor mats. Consult your Volvo retailer.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 209 08 Car care

Paint touch up

Touching up minor paint damage Minor stone chips and scratches NOTE Paint damage requires immediate attention to Material: When touching up the vehicle, it should be avoid rusting. Make it a habit to check the finish • Primer – can clean and dry. The surface temperature regularly - when washing the vehicle for should be above 60° F (15° C). instance. Touch-up if necessary. • Paint – touch-up pen Brush If the stone chip has not penetrated down Paint repairs require special equipment and • to the metal and an undamaged layer of skill. Contact a trained and authorized Volvo • Masking tape paint remains, the touch-up paint can be service technician for any extensive damage. applied as soon as the spot has been Minor scratches can be repaired by using cleaned. Volvo touch-up paint. Deep scratches Color code 1. Place a strip of masking tape over the damaged surface. Pull the tape off so that any loose flakes of paint adhere to it. 2. Thoroughly mix the primer and apply it with a small brush. When the primer surface is dry, the paint can be applied using a brush. Mix the paint thoroughly; apply several thin paint coats and let dry after each applica-

G020345 tion. 3. If there is a longer scratch, you may want to protect surrounding paint by masking it off. When ordering touch-up paint from your Volvo retailer, make sure you have the right color. 08 Use the paint code indicated on the model plate (1 in the illustration).

Information Provided by:Provided Information 210 08 Car care

Information Provided by:Provided Information 211 Volvo maintenance...... 214 Maintaining your car...... 215 Hood...... 217 Engine compartment...... 218 Engine oil...... 219 Fluids...... 221 Wiper blades...... 223 Battery...... 224 Replacing bulbs...... 226 Fuses...... 234

Information Provided by:Provided Information 212 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Information Provided by:Provided Information 09 Maintenance and servicing

09 Volvo maintenance

General Maintenance Service Records Information booklet for Volvo advises you to follow the maintenance Your Volvo passed several major inspections detailed information concerning each of the program outlined in the Warranty and Service before it was delivered to you, in accordance warranties. Records Information booklet. This mainte- with Volvo specifications. The maintenance nance program contains inspections and serv- procedures outlined in the Warranty and Serv- Periodic maintenance helps minimize ices necessary for the proper function of your ice Records Information booklet, many of emissions vehicle. The maintenance services contain which will positively affect your vehicle's emis- Periodic maintenance will help keep your vehi- several checks that require special tools and sions, should be performed as indicated. It is cle running well. Your Warranty and Service training, and therefore must be performed by a recommended that receipts for vehicle emis- Records Information booklet provides a com- qualified technician. To keep your Volvo in top sion maintenance be retained in case ques- prehensive periodic maintenance schedule up condition, specify time-tested and proven tions arise concerning maintenance. Inspec- to 150,000 miles (240,000 km) of vehicle main- Genuine Volvo Parts and Accessories. tion and maintenance should also be per- tenance. The schedule includes components formed anytime a malfunction is observed or that affect vehicle emissions. This page The Federal Clean Air Act – U.S suspected. describes some of the emission-related com- The Federal Clean Air Act requires vehicle ponents. manufacturers to furnish written instructions to Applicable warranties – U.S/Canada the ultimate purchaser to assure the proper In accordance with applicable U.S. and Cana- servicing and function of the components that dian regulations, the following list of warranties control emissions. These services, which are is provided. listed in the "Warranty and Service Records • New Vehicle Limited Warranty Information" booklet, are not covered by the warranty. You will be required to pay for labor • Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty and material used. • Corrosion Protection Limited Warranty • Seat Belt and Supplemental Restraint Sys- tems Limited Warranty • Emission Design and Defect Warranty • Emission Performance Warranty These are the federal warranties; other warranties are provided as required by state/provincial law. Refer to your separate Warranty and

Information Provided by:Provided Information 214 09 Maintenance and servicing

Maintaining your car 09

Owner maintenance As needed: If a garage jack is used to lift the vehicle, the Periodic maintenance requirements and inter- • Wash the car, including the undercarriage, two jack attachments points should be used. vals are described in your vehicle's Warranty to reduce wear that can be caused by a They are specially reinforced to bear the weight and Service Records Information booklet. buildup of dirt, and corrosion that can be of the vehicle. A garage jack can also be placed caused by salt residues. under the front of the engine support frame. The following points can be carried out Clean leaves and twigs from air intake Take care not to damage the splash guard between the normally scheduled maintenance • vents at the base of the windshield, and under the engine. Ensure that the jack is posi- services. from other places where they may collect. tioned so that the vehicle cannot slide off it. Each time the car is refueled: Always use axle stands or similar structures. • Check the engine oil level. NOTE If a two-post hoist is used to lift the vehicle, the • Clean the windshield, windshield wipers, Complete service information for qualified front and rear lift arm pads should be centered headlights, and taillights. technicians is available online for purchase under the reinforced lift plates on the inboard or subscription at www.volvotechinfo.com. edge of the sill rail (see illustration). Monthly: • Check cold tire pressure in all tires. Inspect Emission inspection readiness the tires for wear. Hoisting the vehicle • Check that engine coolant and other fluid What is an Onboard Diagnostic System levels are between the indicated "min" and (OBD II)? "max" markings. OBD II is part of your vehicle's computerized • Clean interior glass surfaces with a glass engine management system. It stores diagnos- cleaner and soft paper towels. tic information about your vehicle's emission • Wipe driver information displays with a soft controls. It can light the Check Engine light cloth. (MIL) if it detects an emission control "fault." A "fault" is a component or system that is not Visually inspect battery terminals for cor- • performing within an expected range. A fault rosion. Corrosion may indicate a loose ter- may be permanent or temporary. OBD II will minal connector, or a battery near the end store a message about any fault. of its useful service life. Consult a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for additional information.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 215 09 Maintenance and servicing

09 Maintaining your car

How Do States Use OBD II for Emission your vehicle diagnosed and, if necessary, Inspections? serviced by a qualified Volvo technician. Many states connect a computer directly to a • If you recently had service for a lit Check vehicle's OBD II system. The inspector can Engine light, or if you had service that then read "faults." In some states, this type of required disconnecting the battery, a inspection has replaced the tailpipe emission period of driving is necessary to bring the test. OBD II system to "ready" for inspection. A half-hour trip of mixed stop-and-go/high- How Can My Vehicle Fail OBD II Emission way driving is typically needed to allow Inspection? OBD II to reach readiness. Your Volvo Your vehicle can fail OBD II emission inspec- retailer can provide you with more infor- tion for any of the following reasons. mation on planning a trip. • If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit, your • Maintain your vehicle in accordance with vehicle may fail inspection. your vehicle's maintenance schedule. • If your vehicle's Check Engine light was lit, but went out without any action on your part, OBD II will still have a recorded fault. Your vehicle may pass or fail, depending on the inspection practices in your area. • If you had recent service that required disconnecting the battery, OBD II diagnostic information may be incomplete and "not ready" for inspection. A vehicle that is not ready may fail inspection. How Can I Prepare for My Next OBD II Emission Inspection? • If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit – or was lit but went out without service, have

Information Provided by:Provided Information 216 09 Maintenance and servicing

Hood 09

Opening the hood G031032

To open the hood: 1. Pull the lever located under the left side of the dash to release the hood lock. 2. Lift the hood slightly. 3. Press up the release control located under the front edge of the hood (at the center) up to the right, and lift the hood.

WARNING Check that the hood locks engage properly when closed.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 217 09 Maintenance and servicing

09 Engine compartment

Cooling system expansion tank Relay/fuse box Power steering fluid reservoir (concealed Air cleaner behind the headlight) Dipstick – engine oil WARNING Radiator The cooling fan may start or continue to operate (for up to 6 minutes) after the engine Cooling fan has been switched off. Washer fluid reservoir Engine oil filler cap Brake/clutch fluid reservoir Battery

Information Provided by:Provided Information 218 09 Maintenance and servicing

Engine oil 09

Changing engine oil and oil filter Checking the oil See page 277 for oil specifications. Refer to 1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a lint- the Warranty and Service Records Information free rag. booklet for information on the oil change inter- 2. Reinsert the dipstick, pull it out, and check vals. the oil level.

NOTE 3. Add oil if necessary. If the level is close to the MIN mark, add approximately • Volvo does not recommend the use of 0.5 US quarts (0.5 liters) of oil. oil additives. 4. Recheck the level and add more oil if nec- • Synthetic oil is not used when the oil is essary until the level is near the MAX mark. changed at the normal maintenance intervals except at owner request and at

additional charge. Please consult a G020338 trained and qualified Volvo service tech- Location of dipstick and oil filler cap nician.

Checking and adding oil The oil level should be checked at regular intervals, particularly during the period up to the first scheduled maintenance service. • The car should be parked on a level surface when the oil is checked. • If the engine is warm, wait for at least 10–15 minutes after the engine has been G020336 switched off before checking the oil.

Volvo recommends Castrol oil products

Information Provided by:Provided Information 219 09 Maintenance and servicing

09 Engine oil

CAUTION • Not checking the oil level regularly can result in serious engine damage if the oil level becomes too low. • Oil that is lower than the specified quality can damage the engine. • Always add oil of the same type and viscosity as already used. • Never fill oil above the MAX mark. This could cause an increase in oil consumption.

WARNING Do not allow oil to spill onto or come into contact with hot exhaust pipe surfaces

NOTE Volvo uses different systems to indicate a low oil level or pressure. Some models have an oil pressure sensor, in which case a warning symbol (see page 58) is used to indicate low oil pressure. Other models have an oil level sensor, in which case the driver is alerted by the warning symbol in the center of the instrument panel and a text in the information display. Some models use both systems. Contact an authorized Volvo retailer for more information.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 220 09 Maintenance and servicing

Fluids 09

Washer fluid Coolant CAUTION • If necessary, top up the cooling system with Volvo Genuine Coolant/Antifreeze only (a 50/50 mix of water and antifreeze). • Different types of antifreeze/coolant may not be mixed. • If the cooling system is drained, it should be flushed with clean water or premixed anti-freeze before it is refilled with the correct mixture of water/antifreeze. • The cooling system must always be kept filled to the correct level, and the level must be between the MIN and Washer fluid reservoir Coolant reservoir MAX marks. If it is not kept filled, there The washer fluid reservoir is located in the Normally, the coolant does not need to be can be high local temperatures in the engine compartment and holds approximately changed. If the system must be drained, con- engine which could result in damage. 4.2 US qts (4 liters). During cold weather, the sult a trained and qualified Volvo service tech- Check coolant regularly! reservoir should be filled with windshield nician. • Do not top up with water only. This washer solvent containing antifreeze. reduces the rust-protective and antifreeze qualities of the coolant and has a lower boiling point. It can also cause damage to the cooling system if it should freeze. • Do not use chlorinated tap water in the vehicle's cooling system.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 221 09 Maintenance and servicing

09 Fluids

WARNING Fluid type: DOT 4+ boiling point >536 °F Power steering fluid (>280 °C), P/N 9437433 The fluid level is checked at each service inter- Never remove the expansion tank cap • val. while the engine is warm. Wait until the Replace: The fluid should be replaced accord- engine cools. ing to the intervals specified in the Warranty Fluid type: Volvo power steering fluid or equiv- and Service Records Information booklet. If it is necessary to top off the coolant alent. • When driving under extremely hard conditions when the engine is warm, unscrew the Replace: No fluid change required. expansion tank cap slowly so that the (mountain driving, etc), it may be necessary to overpressure dissipates. replace the fluid more often. Consult your Volvo retailer. Always entrust brake fluid WARNING changing to a trained and qualified Volvo serv- If a problem should occur in the power Brake fluid ice technician. steering system or if the vehicle has no electrical current and must be towed, it is still WARNING possible to steer the vehicle. However, keep in mind that greater effort will be required to • If the fluid level is below the MIN mark turn the steering wheel. in the reservoir or if a brake-related message is shown in the information display: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the car towed to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician and have the brake system inspected. • Dot 4+ should never be mixed with any other type of brake fluid.

Brake fluid reservoir The brake fluid should always be between the MIN and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir. Check, without removing the cap, that there is sufficient fluid in the reservoir.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 222 09 Maintenance and servicing

Wiper blades 09

Replacing windshield wiper blades Keeping the windshield wiper blades clean helps improve visibility and prolongs the service life of the wiper blades. See page 206 for washing instructions. G020330

1. Fold out the wiper arm. 2. Press the button on the wiper blade attachment and pull straight out (1), parallel with the wiper arm. 3. Press a new wiper blade (2) until it clicks into place. 4. Ensure the blade is securely attached (3). 5. Fold in the wiper arm. The wiper blades are different lengths. The blade on the driver's side is longer than the one on the passenger's side. G020329

Information Provided by:Provided Information 223 09 Maintenance and servicing

09 Battery

Battery maintenance • To help keep the battery in good condition, Battery symbols the vehicle should be driven for at least 15 Driving habits and conditions, climate, the Wear protection goggles number of starts, etc., all affect the service life minutes a week or connected to a charger and function of the battery. In order for your with an automatic charging function. battery to perform satisfactorily, keep the fol- • If the battery is fully discharged a number lowing in mind: of times, this may shorten its service life. Keeping the battery fully charged helps Check the fluid level in each cell in the battery prolong its service life. every 24 months or every 15,0001 miles The service life of a battery is affected by See owner’s manual for (24,000 km), whichever is sooner. • factors such as driving conditions and cli- details • Use a screw driver to open the caps or mate. Extreme cold may also further cover and a flashlight to inspect the level. decrease the battery’s starting capacity. • If necessary, add distilled water. The level • Because the battery’s starting capacity should never be above the indicator. decreases with time, it may be necessary • The fluid level should be checked if the to recharge it if the vehicle is not driven for Keep away from children battery has been recharged. an extended period of time or if the vehicle is usually only driven short distances. • After inspection, be sure the cap over each battery cell or the cover is securely in • place. • Check that the battery cables are correctly WARNING connected and properly tightened. PROPOSITION 65 WARNING! Corrosive • Never disconnect the battery when the Battery posts, terminals, and related acces- engine is running, or when the key is in the sories contain lead and lead compounds, ignition. This could damage the vehicle's chemicals known to the state of California electrical system. to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling. • The battery should be disconnected from the vehicle when a battery charger is used directly on the battery.

1 More frequently in warm climates.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 224 09 Maintenance and servicing

Battery 09

No smoking, no open 4. Disconnect the battery negative (ground) WARNING cable. flames, no sparks • Never expose the battery to open flame 5. Disconnect the positive cable. or electric spark. 6. Remove the front side of the battery box • Do not smoke near the battery. with a screwdriver. • Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do 7. Release the clamp holding the battery. not allow battery fluid to contact eyes, Explosion skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If con- 8. Lift out the battery. tact occurs, flush the affected area Installing a new battery immediately with water. Obtain medical help immediately if eyes are affected. 1. Put the battery in place in the engine compartment.

Recycle properly 2. Install the battery's retaining clamp. 3. Reinstall the front side of the battery box. 4. Connect the positive cable. 5. Connect the ground cable. 6. Reinstall the cover over the battery.

Battery replacement NOTE Removing the battery Used batteries should be properly disposed 1. Switch off the ignition and remove the key. of at a recycling station or similar facility, or taken to your Volvo retailer. 2. Wait at least 5 minutes after switching off the ignition before disconnecting the battery so that all information in the vehicle's electrical system can be stored in the control modules. 3. Remove the cover over the battery.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 225 09 Maintenance and servicing

09 Replacing bulbs

Introduction Removing the headlight housing Before replacing bulbs in your vehicle, please keep the following points in mind: WARNING • The engine should not be running when NOTE changing bulbs. Never touch the glass of bulbs with your fin- • If the engine has been running just prior gers. Grease and oils from your fingers to replacing bulbs in the headlight hous- vaporize in the heat and will leave a deposit ing, please keep in mind that compo- on the reflector, which will damage it. nents in the engine compartment will be The optional Active Bending Light bulbs hot. contain trace amounts of mercury. These bulbs should always be disposed of by a trained and qualified Volvo service techni- WARNING cian. Active Bending Lights* – due to the high Certain bulbs should only be replaced by a voltage used by these headlights, these The entire headlight housing must be lifted out trained and qualified Volvo service techni- bulbs should only be replaced by a trained when replacing the high/low beam, parking cian: and qualified Volvo service technician. light, turn signal, and side marker bulbs. To lift • Courtesy lighting out the housing: • Reading lights 1. Remove the key from the ignition and turn • Glove compartment lights the headlight switch to position . • Turn signals and courtesy lights in the side door mirrors 2. Open the hood. • High-mounted brake lights 3. Pull up the headlight housing's retaining pin. • Active Bending Lights, Brake lights 4. Pull out the headlight housing. See page 232 for a list of bulb specifications.

Information Provided by:Provided Information

226 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 09 Maintenance and servicing

Replacing bulbs 09

Low beam bulb

Low beam bulb 5. Disconnect the wiring connector by pressing down the clip with your thumb while at Cover with retaining clamps Installing a new bulb the same time pulling the connector with 1. Open the hood and remove the headlight 1. Insert the new bulb. It can only be installed your other hand. housing (see page 226 for instructions). in one position. 6. Lift out the headlight housing and place it 2. Release the retaining clamps on the cover 2. Press the retaining spring inward and on a soft surface to avoid scratching the and remove it. upward and slightly to the right until it lens. 3. Release the bulb's retaining spring holding snaps into place. the bulb in place by pressing it first to the 3. Press the wiring connector onto the bulb. CAUTION left to release it and then moving it outward 4. Put the plastic cover in place. When disconnecting the connector, pull on and downward. the connector itself and not on the wiring. 5. Press the retaining clamps back into place. 4. Pull out the bulb. 6. Reinstall the headlight housing (see After the defective bulb has been replaced, page 226). reinsert the housing in the reverse order. Check that the retaining pin is correctly inserted.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 227 09 Maintenance and servicing

09 Replacing bulbs

High beam bulb WARNING Parking light bulb Active Bending Lights* – due to the high voltage used by these headlights, the Active Bending Light bulbs should only be replaced by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

3. Driver's side headlight: Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise. Passenger's side headlight: Turn the bulb holder clockwise. 4. Pull out the bulb holder and replace the bulb. 5. Reinstall the bulb holder. It can only be Halogen high beam bulb installed in one position. 1. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise, 1. Open the hood. 6. Reinstall the headlight housing (see pull it out and replace the bulb. 2. Remove the headlight housing (see page 226). 2. Press the bulb holder back into place. It page 226). can only be installed in one position.

NOTE NOTE The halogen high beam bulb has a different Vehicles equipped with the optional Active socket on vehicles equipped with the Bending Lights (headlights) have LED park- optional Active Bending Lights. On these ing lights that cannot be replaced. models, pull the bulb straight out.

Information Provided by:Provided Information

228 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 09 Maintenance and servicing

Replacing bulbs 09

Turn signal Side marker light Front fog lights*

1. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and 1. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise, remove it. pull it out, and replace the bulb. 1. Switch off all lights and turn the key to position 0. 2. Remove the bulb from the holder by press- 2. Reinstall the bulb holder. It can only be ing it in and twisting it counterclockwise. installed in one position. 2. Using a screwdriver or other suitable tool, pry out the fog light cover and pull it 3. Insert a new bulb and reinstall the bulb straight out as shown in the illustration. holder in the headlight housing. > (Release the clips (1) and then pull straight out (2).) 3. Unscrew the lamp housing's retaining screw and remove the housing. 4. Disconnect the connector from the bulb. 5. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and pull it out.

Information Provided by:Provided Information

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 229 09 Maintenance and servicing

09 Replacing bulbs

6. Press a new bulb into place and turn it 2. Remove the covers in the left/right panels Back-up light clockwise. to access the bulb holders. 7. Reinsert the bulb holder. The mark TOP 3. Disconnect the wiring connector from the NOTE should be upward. affected bulb holder. If the message indicating a burned out bulb 8. Secure the fog light housing with the 4. Press the catches together and pull out the remains in the information display after the retaining screw and press the panel back bulb holder. bulb has been replaced, consult a trained into place. and qualified Volvo service technician. 5. Replace the defective bulb. 6. Press the bulb holder into place and rein- Removing the taillight bulb holder High-level brake light stall the cover. These bulbs should only be replaced by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. Location of taillight bulbs License plate lighting

All bulbs in the taillight cluster can be replaced from the trunk. To access the bulb holders: 1. Switch off all lights and turn the key to Location of taillight bulbs position 0. Taillight/parking light/fog light 1. Switch off all lights and turn the key to Turn signal position 0.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 230 09 Maintenance and servicing

Replacing bulbs 09

2. Remove the screws with a screw driver. 3. Install a new bulb. Rear reading light bulbs 3. Detach the lens (bulb housing) carefully. 4. Press the lens back into place. 4. Replace the defective bulb. Trunk lighting 5. Reinstall the entire bulb housing and screw it into place.

Footwell lighting G020969

1. Insert a screwdriver and turn it gently to detach the bulb housing. 2. Remove the defective bulb. 1. Insert a screwdriver and turn it gently to 3. Install a new bulb. detach the bulb housing.

G020795 4. Press the bulb housing back into place. 2. Remove the defective bulb. The footwell lighting is located under the dash- 3. Install a new bulb. board on the driver's and passenger's sides. 4. Press the bulb housing back into place. To replace a bulb: 1. Insert a screwdriver under the edge of the lens. Turn the screwdriver gently to detach the lens. 2. Remove the defective bulb.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 231 09 Maintenance and servicing

09 Replacing bulbs

Vanity mirror lighting 5. To reinstall the mirror, begin by pressing Lighting Wattage Bulb the three lugs at the upper edge of the mir- function ror back into place. 6. Press the three lower lugs back into place. Back-up 6 H6W lights

NOTE Rear fog 21 P21W LL For information regarding any other bulbs light not mentioned in this section, please contact your Volvo retailer or a trained and Rear turn 21 PY21W SV authorized Volvo service technician. signals Front turn 24 PY24W SV Bulb specifications signals

G020253 Lighting Wattage Bulb License 5 C5W LL function plate light- 1. Insert a screwdriver under the center of the ing Low beam 55 H11 LL lower edge of the mirror, turn it, and care- Vanity mir- 1.2 SV5.5 (length fully pry up the lugs at the edge. headlights (halogen) ror 35mm) 2. Move the screwdriver under the edge on the left and right-hand sides (near the black High beam 60 HB3 Front park- 5 W5W LL BV rubber sections) and pry carefully to headlights ing lights (halogen) release the lower edge of the mirror. Front side 5 W5W LL 3. Pry carefully and lift out the entire mirror High beam 55 H7 LL marker and the cover. headlights lights (models 4. Remove the defective bulb and replace it Front fog 35 H8 with Active with a new one. lights* Bending Lights*)

Information Provided by:Provided Information

232 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 09 Maintenance and servicing

Replacing bulbs 09

Lighting Wattage Bulb function Glove com- 3 W2.1x9.5d partment type T10 light

Trunk light- 5 SV8.5 (length ing 38mm)

Footwell 3 W2.1x9.5d lighting type T10

NOTE Please consult a Volvo retailer’s Parts department for the most up-to-date specifications.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 233 09 Maintenance and servicing

09 Fuses

Replacing fuses There are relay/fuse boxes located in the engine compartment and the passenger compartment. If an electrical component fails to function, this may be due to a blown fuse. The easiest way to see if a fuse is blown is to remove it. To do so: 1. Pull the fuse straight out. If a fuse is difficult to remove, special fuse removal tools are located on the inside of the fuse box covers. 2. From the side, examine the curved metal wire in the fuse to see if it is intact. 3. If the wire is broken, insert a new fuse of the same color and amperage (written on the fuse). If fuses burn out repeatedly, have the electrical system inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

WARNING Never use metal objects or fuses with higher amperage than those stated on the following pages. Doing so could seriously damage or overload the vehicle's electrical system.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 234 09 Maintenance and servicing

Fuses 09

Fuse box in the engine compartment G007446

The fuse box in the engine compartment has positions for 36 fuses. • Fuses 1–18 are relays/circuit breakers and should only be removed or replaced by an authorized Volvo service technician. • Fuses 19–36 may be changed at any time when necessary. Several extra fuses and a fuse removal tool to assist in removing/replacing fuses can be found on the underside of the fuse box cover in the engine compartment.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 235 09 Maintenance and servicing

09 Fuses

Fuses in the engine compartment G020250

1. Coolant fan (radiator) 50A 9. Engine functions 30A 16. Feed to audio system 40A

2. Power steering 80A 10. Climate system blower 40A 17. Windshield wipers 30A

3. Feed to passenger com- 60A 11. Headlight washers, climate 20A 18. Feed to passenger com- 40A partment fuse box system blower, power partment fuse box retractable hard top 4. Feed to passenger com- 60A 19. Not in use partment fuse box 12. Feed to heated rear window 30A 20. Horn 15A 5. Element, climate unit 80A 13. Starter motor relay 30A 21. Not in use 6. Not in use 14. Trailer connector (acces- 40A sory) 22. Subwoofer 25A 7. ABS pump 30A 15. Power retractable hard top 30A 8. ABS valves 20A

Information Provided by:Provided Information 236 09 Maintenance and servicing

Fuses 09

23. Engine control module 10A (ECM)/transmission control module (TCM)

24. Not in use

25. Not in use

26. Ignition switch 15A

27. A/C compressor 10A

28. Not in use

29. Front fog lights* 15A

30. Not in use

31. Not in use

32. Fuel injectors 10A

33. Heated oxygen sensor, vac- 20A uum pump

34. Ignition coils, climate unit 10A pressure sensor

35. Engine sensor valves, A/C 15A relay, relay coil, PTC element oil trap, canister, mass air meter

36. Engine control module 10A (ECM), throttle sensor

Information Provided by:Provided Information

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 237 09 Maintenance and servicing

09 Fuses

Fuse box in the passenger compartment G020601

The fuse box in the passenger compartment is 6. Pull the center pins fully out of the mount- located under the glove compartment. ing clips, secure the upholstery with the mounting clips and press the pins into the To access the fuses: mounting clips again. The mounting clips 1. Remove the upholstery covering the fuse then expand, holding the upholstery in box by first pressing in the center pins in position. the mounting clips approximately 0.5 in (1 cm) with a small screwdriver and then pulling the clips out. 2. Turn both retaining screws (2) counterclockwise until they release. 3. Fold down the fuse box (3) half way. Pull it toward the seat until it stops. Fold it down completely. The fuse box can be unhooked completely. 4. Replace the blown fuse. 5. Close the fuse box in reverse order.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 238 09 Maintenance and servicing

Fuses 09

Fuses in the passenger compartment

- Fuse 37-42, not in use - 46. Lighting – glove compart- 5A 52. Transmission control mod- 5A ment, instrument panel, and ule (TCM), ABS 43. Audio system, Blue- 15A footwells tooth,Volvo Navigation sys- 53. Power steering 10A tem* 47. Interior lighting 5A 54. Park assist*, Active Bending 10A 44. Supplemental Restrain Sys- 10A 48. Windshield washers 15A Lights* tem (SRS), engine control module 49. Supplemental Restrain Sys- 10A 55. Not in use tem (SRS), Occupant 45. 12-volt sockets in passeng- 15A Weight Sensor (OWS) 56. Volvo Navigation System 10A er's compartment remote key module, alarm 50. Not in use siren control module

51. Fuel filter relay 10A 57. On-board diagnostic 15A socket, brake light switch Information Provided by:Provided Information

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 239 09 Maintenance and servicing

09 Fuses

58. Right high beam, auxiliary 7.5A 74. Fuel pump relay 15A lights relay 75. Not in use 59. Left high beam 7.5A 76. Not in use 60. Heated driver's seat* 15A 77. 12-volt socket in trunk 15A 61. Heated passenger's seat* 15A Auxiliary equipment control 62. Not in use module (AEM)

63. Power window – rear pas- 20A 78. Not in use senger's side 79. Back-up lights 5A 64. Sirius satellite radio* 5A 80. Not in use 65. Audio system 5A 81. Power window – rear driv- 20A 66. Audio system control mod- 10A er's side ule (ICM), climate system 82. Power window – front pas- 25A 67. Not in use senger's side door

68. Cruise control 5A 83. Power window and door 25A lock – front driver's side 69. Climate system, rain sen- 5A door sor*, BLIS button* 84. Power passenger's seat 25A 70. Not in use 85. Power driver's seat 25A 71. Not in use 86. Interior lighting relay, trunk 5A 72. Not in use lighting, power seats 73. Front ceiling lighting 5A

Information Provided by:Provided Information

240 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 09 Maintenance and servicing

Information Provided by:Provided Information 241 Introduction ...... 244 Audio functions...... 245 Radio functions...... 251 CD player...... 259 Audio menu...... 262 Bluetooth® hands-free connection...... 263

Information Provided by:Provided Information 242 AUDIO

Information Provided by:Provided Information 10 Audio

Introduction

Controls Navigation control: Use the up/down arrows to navigate among menu alterna- 10 tives. EXIT: press to exit the menu system ENTER: press to confirm a selection or activate/deactivate a function The audio system's functions can also be controlled from the steering wheel keypad. The menu alternatives are numbered and can be selected directly from the keypad. Press MENU and then the number(s) of the desired menu alternative. G020245 Audio levels POWER: press for on/off. If the audio sys- The audio systems is available in three levels: tem is on when the remote key is turned to 1 position 0, it will continue to play until the • Performance key is removed from the ignition slot (or the • High Performance driver's door is opened on vehicles with the • Premium Sound* optional keyless drive). The system will start automatically the next time the key is NOTE turned to position I. See page 146 for information about the ignition switch positions. The audio system features and equipment described in this chapter may not be avail- Display able on all audio levels. Keypad MENU: opens the menu system

1 Certain Canadian models

Information Provided by:Provided Information

244 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 10 Audio

Audio functions

Audio system controls matically according to the vehicle's speed, see Steering wheel keypad page 249 for more information on this function. 10

Selecting a sound source Press AM/FM (2) repeatedly to toggle between FM1, FM2, and AM. Press MODE (3) repeatedly to toggle between the CD player and the external sound source AUX, USB, the optional Sir- ius satellite radio or BT1. The currently selected sound source will be shown in the display.

Daytime/twilight display G026424 In daylight the information in the center console Steering wheel keypad VOLUME dial screen is displayed against a light background. The four buttons on the steering wheel keypad AM/FM – select a radio band In darkness it is displayed against a dark back- can also be used to control the audio system. ground. MODE – select a sound source These buttons can be used to adjust volume, shift between preset stations and change CD TUNING dial tracks. Press one of the two left-hand buttons briefly to change to the next/previous preset SOUND button radio station, or to go to the next/previous track Navigation controls/menu selections on a CD. Press and hold down these buttons to search within a track on a CD. Volume Use the volume dial (1) or the buttons in the steering wheel keypad to adjust the volume level. The volume level is also adjusted auto-

1 Bluetooth streaming audio Information Provided by:Provided Information 245 10 Audio

Audio functions

USB/AUX connector If the device is being charged through a 12-volt Turn the Tuning knob (no. 4 in the illustra- socket while it is connected to the AUX or port, tion on page 251) clockwise or counter- 10 sound quality may be impaired. clockwise. A sound source must be chosen, depending on Use the right or left arrow keys on the nav- the device that has been connected: igation control (no. 5 in the illustration on page 251) to select the desired track. The 1. Use MODE to select iPod or USB. The text arrow keys on the steering wheel keypad Connect device will be displayed. can also be used in the same way. 2. Connect the device to the connector in the center console storage compartment (see NOTE the illustration). • The system supports a number of The text LOADING will be displayed while the iPod models produced in 2005 or later. system loads the files (folder structure) on the In order to help avoid damage to the device. This may take a short time. • USB socket, it will be switched off if When information about the files (the folder there is a short circuit or if the con- Connectors in the center console structure) on the device has been loaded, the nected device uses too much current AUX socket resulting list includes information on the artist, (which can happen if the device does USB connector genre and song title. not comply with the USB standard). The USB socket will reactivate the next time To navigate in the folder structure, press An auxiliary device, such as an iPod2, MP3 the ignition is switched on if the problem player or a USB flash drive can be connected ENTER and scroll up and down the folders no longer exists. If the problem persists, to the audio system via the connectors in the using the arrow buttons (on the audio system contact a trained and authorized Volvo center console storage compartment. A stand- control panel or on the steering wheel keypad). service technician. Press the right arrow button to select a folder. ard cable from an iPod or MP3 player can be Press the left arrow button to go up a level in routed under the cover to the connector(s) in USB flash drive the storage compartment. the folder structure. Press ENTER to go down a level in the folder structure. To simplify the use of a USB flash drive, it is advisable to only store music files on the drive. Tracks can be selected in two ways: It will take considerably longer for the system

2 Registered trademark of Apple Computer Inc.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 246 10 Audio

Audio functions to index the files on the drive if it contains any- NOTE 5. Press MENU on the audio system, and thing other than compatible music files. navigate to AUX input volume. When an iPod is used as a sound source, 10 the vehicle's audio system has a menu 6. Turn the volume knob to raise or lower the NOTE structure similar to the one in the iPod. See AUX input volume until you hear music at • The system supports removable media the iPod's manual for detailed information. a comfortable level. that uses the USB 2.0 standard and the 7. If there is distortion, lower your music play- FAT32 file system. It can index up to For further information, refer to the accessory er's headphone volume until the distortion 1,000 folders and a maximum of 254 manual USB/iPod Music Interface. goes away. sub-folders/files for each folder. How- ever, the highest folder level can sup- Adjusting volume for an external device 8. Finally, exit the menu and adjust the audio port up to 1,000 sub-folders/files. The volume of an external device may be dif- volume to a comfortable level. ferent from the volume of the internal sound • When using a longer type of USB device, connecting it with a USB sources such as the CD player or the radio. It Bluetooth streaming audio (BT) adapter cable will help reduce mechan- the external device's volume is too high, the The vehicle's audio system is equipped with ical wear on the USB socket and on the quality of the sound may be impaired. To help Bluetooth, which makes it possible to play device. prevent this, adjust the external device's input streaming audio files from a Bluetooth device volume as follows: such as a cell phone or personal digital assis- tant (PDA). Navigation and control of the device MP3 player 1. While playing the radio or a CD, lower the can be done through the vehicle's center con- Many MP3 players have a file indexing system audio volume to about one-quarter. sole control panel or the steering wheel key- that is not supported by the vehicle's audio 2. Switch to AUX mode on the audio system pad. On certain external devices, it is also pos- system. In order to use an MP3 player, the sys- by pressing the MODE button. sible to change tracks from the device itself. tem must be set to USB Removable device/ Mass Storage Device. 3. Connect the headphone output from your In order to listen streaming audio, BT must be music player to the AUX input using a cable selected as a sound source (see page 245) and iPod with a stereo 3.5 mm miniplug at both a Bluetooth device must be connected An iPod receives current and its battery is ends. (paired) with the audio system. See page 263 charged through the connecting cord. How- 4. Set your music player's headphone vol- for more information. ever, if the iPod's battery is completely ume to three-quarters using the player's drained, it should be recharged before the volume controls. iPod is connected to the audio system.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 247 10 Audio

Audio functions

NOTE Sound settings Subwoofer (accessory)–set the level for the subwoofer (bass speaker) 10 Any Bluetooth media players used must Optimal sound reproduction support Audio/Video Remote Control Pro- The audio system is calibrated for optimal CENTER–make settings for the center speaker file (AVRCP) and Advanced Audio Distribu- sound reproduction through the use of digital tion Profile (A2DP). The player must use SURROUND–make settings for surround signal processing. This calibration takes into AVRCP version 1.3 and A2DP 1.2. If older sound versions of these standards are used, cer- account the speakers, amplifier, cabin acous- tain features (e.g., scan or random) may not tics, the seating position of the listener, etc., for Subwoofer (accessory) function. each combination of vehicle and audio system. To switch the subwoofer on or off: There is also dynamic calibration that takes Not all cell phones or media players are fully 1. Press MENU followed by ENTER. compatible with the vehicle's Bluetooth sys- into account the setting of the volume control, tem. A list of compatible devices is available radio reception, and the vehicle's speed. The 2. Select AUDIO SETTINGS and press at you Volvo retailer or at www.volvo- sound settings described in this manual, such ENTER. cars.us. as BASS, TREBLE, and Equalizer front…/ 3. Select SUBWOOFER and press ENTER. Equalizer rear… are only intended to enable Listening to streaming audio the user to adapt sound reproduction to his/her Surround sound Press MODE several times to select BT as a personal preferences. Surround sound settings are used to balance sound levels throughout the sound source. 1. Press SOUND (5). Press this button vehicle. Surround settings for the var- Audio files on the connected device can be repeatedly until you come to the setting G021216 that you wish to change. ious sound sources are made sepa- selected in three ways: rately. • Turn the TUNING dial (4) in either direction. 2. Turn the TUNING dial (4) to make the desired setting. • Use the navigation bottons / (6) to select an audio file. The following settings can be made: • Use the / buttons on the steering BASS–set the bass level wheel keypads. TREBLE–set the treble level BALANCE–set the left/right sound balance FADER–set the front/rear sound balance

Information Provided by:Provided Information 248 10 Audio

Audio functions

NOTE The Dolby Surround Pro Logic II System is 3. Select Equalizer front…/Equalizer manufactured under licence from Dolby rear… and press ENTER. • Dolby Surround Pro Logic II is only Laboratories Licensing Corporation. 10 available on the Premium Sound sys- The column in the display indicates the sound tem. Activating/deactivating Surround sound level for the current frequency. • When listening to FM radio stations, 1. Press MENU followed by ENTER. • Adjust the level with the TUNING dial (4), Dolby Surround Pro Logic II functions or use the Up/Down arrows. Additional fre- 2. Select SUBWOOFER in the menu and best in areas with strong reception. If quencies can be selected with the Right/ press ENTER. reception is weak, selecting 2 or 3- Left arrows. channel stereo may provide better 3. Select Surround SURROUND AM/ • Save the settings by pressing ENTER or sound quality. SURROUND FM/SURROUND CD/ exit without saving by pressing EXIT. SURROUND AUX and press ENTER. Automatic sound control The Dolby symbol will be appear in the display 4. Select Dolby Pro Logic II, 3-channel The audio system's volume is adjusted auto- when Dolby Pro Logic II is activated. stereo or Off and press ENTER. matically according to the speed of the vehicle. There are three alternative settings: Equalizer Front/Rear There are three settings available, which deter- • Pro Logic II This function is used to fine-tune the sound mine the level of volume compensation: • 3-channel level for different frequencies separately. • Low • Off (normal 2-channel stereo) • Medium3 NOTE Dolby Surround Pro Logic II distributes the • High This function is only available on certain stereo sound's two channels to the left, center, To set the automatic sound level: right and rear speakers, making sound repro- sound systems. duction more authentic than ordinary two- 1. Press MENU followed by ENTER. channel stereo. To adjust the equalizer settings: 2. Select AUDIO SETTINGS in the menu and Dolby Surround Pro Logic II and the Dolby 1. Press MENU followed by ENTER. press ENTER. symbol are trademarks of Dolby 2. Select AUDIO SETTINGS in the menu and 3. Select Auto. volume control… in the Laboratories Licensing Corporation. press ENTER. menu and press ENTER.

3 Default setting. Information Provided by:Provided Information 249 10 Audio

Audio functions

4. Select Low, Medium, or High and press ENTER. 10

Information Provided by:Provided Information 250 10 Audio

Radio functions

Radio function controls EXIT–press to cancel a menu selection or Storing preset stations a selected function Manually storing a station 10 AUTO–search for and store the strongest 1. Tune to the desired station. radio stations in the area in which you are driving 2. Press and hold the preset button under which the station is to be stored. The audio Searching for stations system sound will be interrupted for a few There are two ways to manually tune a radio seconds and Station stored will appear in station: the display. Turn the TUNING dial (3) to the desired frequency. NOTE Press the left or right arrow key on the A total of 30 stations can be stored; 10 sta- menu navigation control and hold it down. tions each in AM, FM1 and FM2.

G026366 The radio scans slowly in the selected direction and will increase the scanning Automatically storing a station AM/FM1/FM2 selection speed after a few seconds. Release the Pressing AUTO (7) automatically searches for button when the desired frequency and stores up to ten strong AM or FM stations Station preset buttons appears in the display. in a separate memory. If more than ten stations TUNING dial for selecting radio stations The frequency can be fine-tuned by short are found, the ten strongest ones are stored. presses on the left/right arrow keys. This function is especially useful in areas in SCAN which you are not familiar with radio stations or MENU NAVIGATION CONTROL–press their frequencies. the up or down arrow keys to scroll in a To use the AUTO function: menu, or the keys on the left/right sides of the control to search for or change radio 1. Select a waveband using the AM/FM but- stations/CD tracks ton (1). 2. Start the search by pressing AUTO until Autostoring appears in the display. When the search is completed, Autostoring will no longer be displayed. If there are no sta- Information Provided by:Provided Information 251 10 Audio

Radio functions

tions with sufficient signal strength, No AST The radio will then exit auto-store mode and The SCAN function will be deactivated and the found is displayed. the stored station can be selected by pressing station can be selected by pressing the preset 10 the preset button. button. The auto-stored stations can be selected using the preset buttons (2). Scanning Radio text Press EXIT (6) to terminate the automatic storing function. SCAN (4) automatically searches through the Certain stations broadcast program informa- selected waveband for strong AM or FM station, which can be shown in the display. When the radio is in auto-store mode, Auto is tions. When the radio finds a station, that sta- To start this function: shown in the display. Auto disappears when tion will be played for approximately 8 sec- you return to normal radio mode, which can be onds, after which scanning resumes. 1. Select FM1 or FM2 and press the MENU done by briefly pressing AM/FM (1), EXIT (6), button. or AUTO (7). Activating/deactivating SCAN 2. Press ENTER. 1. Select radio mode using the AM/FM but- To return to the Auto-store mode, press the ton (2). 3. Select Radio text in the menu and press AUTO button briefly and select a stored station ENTER. by pressing one of the preset buttons (2). 2. Press SCAN to activate the function. SCAN is shown in the display. To deactivate this function, select Radio text Saving auto-stored stations in the preset again and press ENTER. memory 3. Press the SCAN or EXIT button to deactivate the scan function and listen to the An auto-stored station can be saved in the selected station. memory for manually preset stations. 1. Press AUTO (7) briefly. Storing a station found with SCAN > Auto is displayed. A station can be stored as a preset while the SCAN function is activated. 2. Press one of the preset buttons (2) under which the station is to be stored. Hold Press one of the preset buttons (2) under down the button until Station stored is which the station is to be stored. Hold displayed. down the button until Station stored is displayed.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 252 10 Audio

Radio functions

The IBOC system is referred to as a "hybrid" HD Radio reception (U.S. How HD broadcasting works ൅ since it is both analogue and digital. During 1 HD Radio works similarly to conventional radio models only) hybrid operation, receivers still continue to and broadcasts of this type are available in 10 Introduction receive the analogue (non-digital) signal. HD many areas of the United States. However, radio receivers incorporate both modes of there are a few key differences: reception, where the receiver will automatically Instead of transmitting one analogue sig- switch to the analogue signal if the digital signal • nal, stations send out a bundled signal – cannot be decoded or is lost by the receiver. both analogue and digital. When you have tuned to an HD Radio station, the symbol will appear in the audio sys- • An HD radio receiver can receive both digital and analogue broadcasts. Depending tem display. on the terrain and location of the vehicle More information about HD radio and IBOC (which will influence the signal strength), can be found on Ibiquity's website, the receiver will determine which signal to www.hdradio.com and www.ibiquity.com. receive.

Benefits of digital broadcasting Limitations • Better sound (FM sounds near CD quality • Main channel vs. sub-channels (FM Display when the radio is receiving an HD Radio and AM as analogue FM). only): The main channel is the only channel broadcast that can receive in hybrid mode (both dig- • Some FM frequencies offer a greater num- ital and analogue). If a frequency has sub- HD radio is a brand name registered by the ber of listening choices through “multicast- Ibiquity digital corporation2. They are the channels, they are broadcast in digital ing” (consisting of a frequency's main mode only. The main FM channel will be developer of a broadcasting technology called channel and any sub-channels that may IBOC or In Band On Channel, which refers to displayed as, for example, 93.9 WNYC also be available on that particular fre- (Volvo uses the symbol > to indicate there the method of transmitting a digital radio quency. See also the section "Sub-chan- are sub-channels available) The sub-FM broadcast signal centered on the same fre- nels" below). quency as the AM or FM station's present fre- • When receiving a digital signal there is no quency. multipath disturbance or hisses/pops/ crackling due to outside influences.

1 HD Radio(TM) technology is manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio(TM) and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp. 2 HD Radio (TM) technology is manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio(TM) and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp. Information Provided by:Provided Information 253 10 Audio

Radio functions

channels will be displayed as 93.9 – 2 NOTE 3. Press ENTER to turn HD off (the X will dis- WNYC, 93.9 - 3 WNYC, etc. appear from the box on the display screen). 10 There may be a noticeable difference in • Reception coverage area: Due to current sound quality when a change from analogue This will disable the radio's capability to receive IBOC transmitter power limitations, the to digital or digital to analogue occurs, such digital broadcasts but it will continue to func- reception coverage area in digital mode is as: tion as a conventional (analogue) AM/FM somewhat more limited than the station's receiver. Please note that when HD is switched Volume increase or decrease analogue coverage area. Please be aware • off, it will not be possible to tune to sub-chan- that as with any radio broadcast technol- • Equalizer settings, i.e., Bass/ Midrange/ nels (see the following section for a more ogy, terrain, time of day, foliage level and Treble cut or boost detailed explanation of sub-channels). building location can have positive or neg- Time alignment (Digital program mate- • Repeat steps 2 and 3 above to reactivate HD ative effects on radio reception. rial in extreme cases can be as much as (an X will appear in the box on the display • Analogue to digital/digital to analogue 8 seconds behind the analogue). This screen). blending: Analogue to digital blending will will noticeable as a "stuttering" effect. occur as the signal strength reaches a pre- The above items are dependant on the Sub-channels set threshold in the receiver. This will be broadcaster's equipment settings and do noticeable in fringe areas (areas with weak not indicate a fault in the vehicle's radio reception) and is normal. receiver or antenna systems.

Switching HD on or off The factory setting for HD radio is on. However, when driving through areas with weak HD signals (fringe areas), you may experience that the radio repeatedly switches between analogue/ digital and digital/analogue reception. If this happens, it may be desirable to switch HD off. To do so: 1. Be sure the audio system is switched on and is in AM or FM mode. 2. Press MENU in the center console control Example of an HD Radio station with sub-channels panel.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 254 10 Audio

Radio functions

In many cases, a main HD Radio station (FM NOTE Listening to satellite radio wavebands only) will also have sub-channels The Sirius satellite system consists of a number When the radio has gone into HD mode, 10 offering additional types of programming or • of high elevation satellites in geosynchronous it may take several seconds before the music. orbit. ">" symbol (if the current frequency has In such cases, a number will be displayed to any sub-channels) is displayed to the the right of the frequency number indicating right of the frequency. Pressing the NOTE that the currently tuned frequency has at least arrow keys before the number is dis- • The digital signals from the Sirius satel- one sub-channel. The "2" in the illustration indi- played will cause the radio to tune to the lites are line-of-sight, which means that cates that you are currently listening to the first next available radio station, not to the physical obstructions such as bridges, sub-channel on frequency 93.9. current station's sub-channels. tunnels, etc, may temporarily interfere Selecting sub-channels • When you are no longer in broadcasting with signal reception. To listen to a station's sub-channel(s), press range of the currently tuned sub-chan- • Avoid any obstructions, such as metal- the right arrow key on the center console or on nel, No HD reception will be dis- lic objects transported on roof racks or the steering wheel keypad. To go back to the played. The radio will then be muted in a ski box, or other antennas that may and it will be necessary to tune to or main channel, press the left arrow key. To go impede signals from the SIRIUS satel- search for a new radio station. to subchannel 2 (if available), press the right lites. arrow key. Sub-channels can also be stored as presets, If you are currently tuned to a frequency's main Selecting Sirius radio mode see page 251 for information on storing sta- channel, pressing the left arrow key will tune to 1. Press Power to switch on the audio system tions. the next lower radio frequency. (see page 251 for information on the stand- If you press a sub-channel's preset button, it ard radio functions). may take up to 6 seconds before the channel 2. Press the MODE button repeatedly until becomes audible. If you press this button while Sirius 1 or 2 is displayed. you are out of digital range of the transmitter, No HD reception will be displayed. Activating Sirius radio 1. Tune to a satellite channel that has no audio, which means that the channel is unsubscribed and the text "CALL 888-539-SIRIUS TO SUBSCRIBE" is dis-

Information Provided by:Provided Information 255 10 Audio

Radio functions

played (see also "Selecting a channel" in 5. Use the left or right arrow keys to select a 1. Press MENU and scroll to "Direct channel the right column). channel in the currently chosen category. entry." 10 2. Call Sirius at 1-888-539-SIRIUS (7474). 6. Press ENTER to listen to a channel. 2. Use the numerical keypad to enter the channel's number. 3. When asked for the Sirius ID number press AUTO to display this number. It is also NOTE 3. Press ENTER. The radio will tune to this possible to retrieve the Sirius ID from the • The category "All" is default, which ena- channel, even if it belongs to a category MENU. bles you to scroll through the entire list other than the currently selected one. 4. "Updating subscription" will be dis- of available satellite channels. played while the subscription is being • The channel categories are automati- NOTE updated, after which the display will return cally updated several times a year. This • The numbers of skipped or locked to the normal view. takes approximately two minutes and channels will not be displayed. will interrupt normal broadcasting. A SIRIUS ID message will be displayed while updat- • If a channel is locked, the access code must be entered before the channel can The SIRIUS ID is required when contacting the ing is in progress. Information on channel or feature updates is available at be selected. See "Unlocking a channel" Sirius Call Center. It is used to activate your on page 257. account and when making any account trans- www.sirius.com. actions. The SIRIUS ID is sometimes referred to as the Electronic Serial Number (ESN). Selecting a channel Scanning There are three ways of tuning in a channel: Selecting a channel category NOTE 1. Select Sirius radio mode as described • Using the left and right arrow keys SCAN automatically searches through the above. By turning the tuning control • list of satellite channels, see page 252 for 2. Press ENTER. • Through direct channel entry more detailed information. 3. Use the up/down arrow keys to scroll Direct channel entry through the list of categories. The Sirius satellite channels are numbered Storing a channel A long press on one of the number keys 4. Press ENTER or the right arrow key to consecutively throughout all of the categories. • stores the currently tuned channel on that select a category. To access a channel directly: key. • A short press on a number key while the radio is in Sirius 1 or 2 mode will tune to the

Information Provided by:Provided Information 256 10 Audio

Radio functions

preset satellite channel stored on that but- Song seek Advanced settings ton, regardless of the currently selected When a satellite radio channel plays one of the This menu function enables you to make set- 10 channel category. songs stored in the song memory, the listener tings on certain Sirius satellite radio functions. will be alerted by a text message and an audi- To access this menu: ble signal. Song Seek and Song Memory 1. Press MENU. The Song Seek and Song Memory functions Press ENTER to listen to the song or 2. Scroll to Sirius menu. provide both audio and visual notification when EXIT to cancel. Sirius is broadcasting your favorite songs. To activate/deactivate the song seek function: 3. Select ADVANCED SIRIUS SETTINGS. Song Seek enables you to store the name of the song for future advance notification when 1. Press MENU WARNING that song is being played. The Song Memory 2. Scroll to "Song seek" feature makes it possible to view all of the cur- Settings should be made when the vehicle rent songs that are stored in memory. 3. Press ENTER to activate or deactivate the is at a standstill. function. Song memory The following settings can be made in the Sir- Up to ten songs can be saved in the system's NOTE ius menu. memory. When the song has ended, the radio will • Songs can be added to the song list 1. Press MENU. remain tuned to the channel on which the • Channel skip settings can be made song was played. 2. Scroll to "Add song to song • Channel lock settings can be made memory" and follow the instructions The channel access code can be displayed Radio text • shown in the display. or changed The text that is displayed about the song that If a new song is selected when the memory is is currently playing can be changed. Use the • Your Sirius ID can be displayed full, you will be prompted to press ENTER to AUTO button or the menu to display Artist, delete the last song on the list. Skip options or , or switch off radio Track title: Composer This function is used to remove a channel from text using Sirius radio text…. NOTE the list of available channels. The remaining songs in the list will move Skip current down one position, and the newly added 1. Select Channel skip list and press song will be placed at the top of the list. ENTER.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 257 10 Audio

Radio functions

2. Select a category in the list and press 2. Select Channel lock list and press CHANGE CODE ENTER. ENTER This function makes it possible to change the 10 3. Skip channels in the list presented by 3. Enter the channel access code and press channel access code. The default code pressing ENTER or right arrow key. ENTER. is 0000. To change the code: Unskip all channels 4. Select a category in the list and press This permanently removes all channels from ENTER. 1. Select Change code and press ENTER. the skip list and makes them available for 5. Lock channels in the list presented by 2. Enter the current code and press ENTER. selection. pressing ENTER or right arrow. 3. Enter the code and press ENTER. The channel is now locked and a checked box Temp. unskip all ch. 4. Confirm the new code and press ENTER. This function will temporarily unskip all chan- will be displayed to indicate this. It will be nec- nels and make them available for selection. The essary to enter the channel access code1 in If an incorrect code is entered, the text channels remain on the skip list and will again order to listen to a locked channel. Incorrect code is displayed. be skipped the next time the ignition is Unlocking a channel: If you have forgotten the access code: switched on. A channel's access code1 is required to unlock 1. Select "Sirius ID:" in the Sirius settings a channel. Channel lock menu and press ENTER. Access to specific channels can be restricted Unlock all channels 2. Press and hold the ENTER button for (locked). A locked channel will not provide This permanently removes all channels from 2 seconds. audio, song titles, or artist information. the locked list and makes them available for selection. 3. The current code will be displayed. NOTE Temp. unlock all ch. Your Volvo retailer can also provide you with All channels are initially unlocked. This function will temporarily unlock all chan- assistance. nels and make them available for selection. The channels remain on the locked list and will SIRIUS ID Locking a channel again be locked the next time the ignition is This function displays the 12-digit Sirius acti- 1. Select "Sirius ID:" in the menu and select switched on. vation ID. LOCK OPTIONSLOCK OPTIONS and press ENTER.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 258 10 Audio

CD player

CD function controls CD player When a disc with audio files is inserted in the player, the player scans the disc's folders Playing a CD before it begins playing the files. The length of 10 Start the CD player by pressing the MODE but- time that this takes depends on the quality of ton (5) and inserting a disc in the slot (4). If there the disc. is already a disc inserted, it will begin to play. Navigating the disc and playing tracks NOTE If a disc with audio files is in the CD player, press ENTER to display a list of folders on the If a CD is in the slot when the audio system disc. is in CD mode, the CD will be played automatically. Use the up and down arrows in the navigation control (see the illustration on page 259) to CD eject move among the folders on the disc. Audio files Press the eject button (3) to eject the disc. have the symbol and folders containing these files have the symbol. Press CD Pause ENTER to play a selected folder or a file. MENU NAVIGATION CONTROL–press When the audio system volume is turned off the up or down arrow keys to scroll in a completely, the CD player will pause and will When the music file has been played, the menu, or the keys on the left/right sides of resume playing when the volume is turned up player will continue to play the rest of the files the control to change CD tracks/fast for- again. in the current folder. When all of the files in the ward/back folder have been played, the player will auto- CD eject button Audio files matically go to the next folder and play the files In addition to playing normal music CDs, the in it. CD slot CD player can also play discs containing files Press the left or right arrow key on the naviga- in mp3 or wma format. MODE button tion control if the entire name of the current track does not fit in the display. TUNING dial for selecting tracks NOTE Changing tracks Certain discs that are copy protected cannot be read by the player. Briefly press the left or right arrow keys on the MENU NAVIGATION CONTROL to skip to the previous or next track/file.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 259 10 Audio

CD player

NOTE Scan Compact disc care This function plays the first 10 seconds of each Keep the following in mind when playing/han- 10 The TUNING dial (6) (turn clockwise to go to track/file on the CD. the next track/file, or counterclockwise to dling compact discs go to the previous track/file) or the steering Press SCAN. • Do not put tape or labels on the disc itself. wheel keypad can also be used for this pur- They could become stuck in the player. pose. Press EXIT or SCAN to stop the scan function and listen to an entire track/file. • CDR discs can cause listening problems due to the quality of the disc or recording Fast forward/back CD eject equipment used. Press and hold down the left or right arrows Press the eject button (3) to eject the disc. • DualDisc: The audio side of a DualDisc keys in the menu navigation control (or the (combined CD/DVD) does not meet CD corresponding keys on the steering wheel NOTE specifications and may not play in your keypad) to search within a track/file or the audio system. whole disc. The search continues for as • The Eject all function can only be used Keep the discs clean. Wipe them with a long as the buttons are held down. while the vehicle is at a standstill and will • be cancelled if the vehicle begins to soft, clean, lint-free cloth, working from the Random play move. center outward. If necessary, dampen the cloth with a neutral soap solution. Dry thor- This function plays the tracks/files on a CD in For reasons of traffic safety, the ejected • oughly before using. random order (shuffle). CD must be removed within 12 seconds or it will be automatically drawn back • Never use cleaning spray or antistatic liq- Activating/deactivating the random into the slot and the CD player will enter uid. Use only cleaners specifically made for function pause mode. Press the CD button to CDs. If a normal CD is being played: restart the disc. • Use discs of the correct size only 1. Press MENU followed by ENTER. (3.5" discs should never be used). Volvo does not recommend the use of 2. Select Random and press ENTER. • plastic outer rings on the disc. If a CD with audio files is being played: • Condensation may occur on discs/optical 1. Press MENU followed by ENTER. components of the CD player in cold winter 2. Select Random and press ENTER. weather. The disc can be dried with a clean, lint-free cloth. Optical components 3. Select Disc or Folder and press ENTER. in the CD player may, however, take up to one hour to dry off.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 260 10 Audio

CD player

• Never attempt to play a damaged CD. When not in use, the discs should be • 10 stored in their covers. Avoid storing discs in excessive heat, direct sunlight or in dusty locations.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 261 10 Audio

Audio menu

FM1/FM2 menu AUX menu 1. Radio text 1. AUX input volume… 10 2. Audio settings… 2. Audio settings…

AM menu USB menu 1. Audio settings… 1. Playlist 2. Random… CD menu 3. Track information For normal music CDs 4. Audio settings… 1. Random 2. Disc text 3. Audio settings…

CD menu For CDs containing files in MP3 format 1. Playlist 2. Random… 3. Disc text 4. Audio settings…

Information Provided by:Provided Information 262 10 Audio

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

Introduction and other controls on the cell phone can The symbol indicates that the hands-free always be used regardless of whether or not system is active. the phone is connected to the hands-free sys- 10 tem. A long press on the PHONE button deactivates the hands-free system and disconnects the cell phone. NOTE Not all cell phones are fully compatible with Connecting cell phones the hands-free system. A list of compatible The procedure for connecting a cell phone var- phones is available at your Volvo retailer or ies, depending on the phone itself, and on at www.volvocars.us whether or not the phone has been previously connected. WARNING If this is the first time the phone is to be connected to the hands-free system, proceed as Never use the hands-free feature or any follows: G029503 other device in your vehicle in a way that distracts you from the task of driving safely. Alternative 1–using the vehicle's menus System overview Distraction can lead to a serious accident. Cell phone 1. Activate the cell phone’s Bluetooth® function (refer to the phone’s owner’s manual if Location of the microphone Getting started necessary) or go to www.volvocars.com Center console control panel and display Use the controls in the center console (3) to 2. Activate the vehicle’s Bluetooth® hands- access, navigate and make selections in the free system by briefly pressing the Bluetooth® hands-free hands-free system’s menus (see page 267). PHONE button. This feature makes it possible to set up a wire- Activating/deactivating > Add phone will be displayed. If one or less connection between a Bluetooth -ena- A short press on the PHONE button in the cen- more cell phones are already registered bled cell phone and the vehicle’s audio system. ter console activates the hands-free system. in the system, they will also be dis- This enables the audio system to function as a The text PHONE will appear at the top of the played. hands-free connection and allows you to display to indicate that the audio system is in remote-control a number of the phone’s func- 3. Select Add phone. telephone mode. tions. The microphone used by this system is located in the ceiling console (2). The buttons

Information Provided by:Provided Information 263 10 Audio

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

> The audio system will search for cell The cell phone will be registered and will be the driver’s door is opened on vehicles equip- phones that are in range. This search connected automatically to the audio system ped with the optional keyless drive). 10 takes approximately 30 seconds. Any while the text Synchronizing is displayed. For When the cell phone is disconnected from the phones detected will be displayed with more information on synchronizing a cell hands-free system, a call in progress can be ® their Bluetooth names. The hands-free phone, see page 266. continued using the cell phone’s own speaker ® system’s Bluetooth name will appear When a connection has been established, the and microphone. in the cell phone’s display as My Volvo symbol and the cell phone’s Bluetooth® Car. name will be displayed. The cell phone can NOTE 4. Select one of the cell phones shown in the now be controlled from the audio system. Certain cell phones may require confirma- audio system’s (center console) display. tion from the phone’s keypad when a call is Making a call 5. Using the cell phone’s keypad, enter the transferred from hands-free to the cell 1. Ensure that PHONE is shown at the top of phone. digits shown in the audio system’s display. the center console display and that the Alternative 2–using the cell phone’s menus symbol is visible (by pressing briefly on 1. Activate the hands-free system by briefly PHONE on the center console). Handling calls pressing the PHONE button in the center 2. Dial the desired phone number or use the Incoming calls console. If there is a cell phone connected, phone book (see page 266). Press ENTER to answer a call, even if the disconnect it from the hands-free system. 3. Press ENTER. audio system is currently in e.g., CD or FM 2. Perform a search using the cell phone’s mode. ® End the call by pressing EXIT. Bluetooth function (consult the cell Press EXIT to defer a call. phone’s owner’s manual if necessary). Disconnecting the cell phone 3. Select My Volvo Car in the list of devices The cell phone is automatically disconnected Automatic answer shown in the cell phone’s display. from the audio system if it is moved out of This function means that incoming calls will be range. For more information about connec- answered automatically. Activate or deactivate 4. When prompted, enter the PIN code 1234 tions, see page 263. the function in the menu system under Phone in the cell phone. Menu… Call options… Automatic The cell phone can be manually disconnected 5. answer. Connect to My Volvo Car from the cell from the hands-free system by pressing phone. PHONE. The hands-free system is also deactivated when the ignition is switched off (or if

Information Provided by:Provided Information 264 10 Audio

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

Call settings Sound settings Ringing tones While a call is in progress, press MENU or The hands-free system’s integrated ringing 10 ENTER on the center console to access the Call volume tones can be selected in Phone Menu… following functions: Call volume can be adjusted while a call is in progress using the buttons in the steering Phone settings… Sounds and volume… • Mute microphone: mute the audio sys- wheel keypad. Ring signals… Ring signal 1, etc. tem’s microphone. • Transfer call to cell: transfer the call from Audio system volume NOTE hands-free to the cell phone. When PHONE is displayed, volume for the audio system can be adjusted in the normal The connected cell phone’s ring tone may • Phone book: this feature enables you to way with the audio system's volume control. In not be switched off when one of the hands- search for a stored telephone number. free system's ringing tones is used. order to adjust volume during a phone call, the audio system must be switched to one of the NOTE other modes (FM, CD, etc). If you prefer to use the connected cell phone’s ring tone1, go to Phone Menu… Phone • On certain cell phones, the connection Audio system sound can be automatically is broken when the mute function is muted when a phone call is received in settings… Sounds and volume… Ring used, which is normal. If this happens, signals… Use cell phone signal the hands-free system will prompt you Phone Menu… Phone settings… to reconnect. Sounds and volume… Mute radio and • A new call cannot be initiated while More information about registering adjust the volume with the / keys on the and connecting cell phones another call is in progress. center console. A maximum of 5 cell phones can be registered Ringing volume in the hands-free system. Registration only Go to Phone Menu… Phone settings… needs to be done once for each phone. After registration, the cell phones can then be found Sounds and volume… Ring volume in the list of registered phones. Only one cell and adjust the volume with the / keys on phone can be connected to hands-free at a the center console. time. Phones can be unregistered in Phone Menu… Bluetooth… Remove phone

1 Not supported by all cell phones. Information Provided by:Provided Information 265 10 Audio

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

Automatic connection vated in Phone settings… Synchronize 1. Enter the first letter of the contact’s name When the hands-free system is active and the phone book. Searches for contacts are only and press ENTER or simply press ENTER. 10 most recently connected cell phone is within made in the phone book of the currently con- 2. Select the desired contact and press range, it is detected automatically. When the nected cell phone. ENTER to make a call to that person. audio system searches for the most recently connected phone, this phone’s name appears NOTE Voice control in the display. To manually connect a different If the cell phone that is currently connected cell phone, press EXIT. If a particular cell phone does not support allows calls to be made via voice commands, copying of the phone book, List is empty this function can be used by pressing and hold- Manual connection will be displayed when copying has been ing ENTER. To connect a phone other than the one that completed. was most recently connected or to switch Voice mail number between cell phones that are already regis- If the phone book contains information about The phone number to your voice mail can be tered in the hands-free system: someone who is trying to call you, this infor- changed in the menu Phone settings… mation will be shown in the display. Put the audio system in telephone mode and Call options… Voice mail number. If no number has been stored, this menu can be follow the instructions in the display or change Searching for contacts accessed by a prolonged press on button 1. the connected cell by going into the menu sys- The easiest way to search for a contact in the Once a phone number has been stored, press tem under Phone Menu… Bluetooth… phone book is to press and hold any of the and hold 1 to dial this number. Connect phone or Change phone. buttons 2–9 in the center console (no. 3 in the illustration on page 263. This starts a search Call lists Phone book based on the first letter on the button that has Lists of calls in a particular cell phone are cop- been pressed. In order to use the hands-free system’s phone ied to the hands-free system each time that book (list of contacts), PHONE must be dis- The phone book can also be accessed by phone is connected. These lists are then upda- played at the top of the center console display pressing the navigation buttons / on the ted while the phone is connected. Press ENTER to show the most recently dialed num- and the symbol must be visible. center console or by pressing / on the bers. Other call lists can be found under Call steering wheel keypad. A search can also be The audio system stores a copy of the phone register…. book of each registered cell phone. The phone made in the phone book’s search menu in book is automatically copied each time a Phone book… Search: phone is connected. This function can be acti-

Information Provided by:Provided Information 266 10 Audio

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

NOTE 3. Bluetooth… Certain cell phones display the list of the 3.1. Change phone 10 most recently dialed numbers in reverse 3.2. Remove phone order. 3.3. Connect fr. cell phone Entering text 3.4. Car Bluetooth info Text is entered by using the number buttons in 4. Call options… the center console. Press a button once to enter the first letter on the button, twice to enter 4.1. Automatic answer the second letter, etc. Continue to press the 4.2. Voice mail number button to display other characters. 5. Phone settings… Press EXIT briefly to erase a character. Press and hold EXIT to erase all of the characters that 5.1. Sounds and volume… have been entered. Use the / buttons on 5.1.1. Ring volume the center console to navigate among the char- 5.1.2. Ring signals… acters. 5.1.3. Mute radio Bluetooth® menus 5.2. Synchronize phone book 1. Call register… 1.1. Last 10 missed calls 1.2. Last 10 received calls 1.3. Last 10 dialed calls 2. Call register… 2.1. Search 2.2. Copy fr. cell phone

Information Provided by:Provided Information 267 Label information...... 270 Dimensions and weights...... 272 Fuel, oils, and fluids...... 275 Engine oil...... 277 Engine specifications...... 278 Electrical system...... 280 Three-way catalytic converter...... 281 Overview of information and warning symbols...... 282 Volvo programs...... 284

Information Provided by:Provided Information 268 SPECIFICATIONS

Information Provided by:Provided Information 11 Specifications

Label information

Information Provided by:Provided Information 270 11 Specifications

Label information

Model plate Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)1 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). Codes for The VIN plate is located on the top left surface color and upholstery, etc. of the dashboard. The VIN is also stamped on the right hand door pillar. The model plate is located on the B-pillar and the passenger's door must be open in order to Vehicle Emission Control Information see it. Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable 11 Federal Motor Vehicle Safety emission standards, as evidenced by the certification label on the underside of the hood. Standards (FMVSS) specifications (USA) For further information regarding these regula- and Ministry of Transport (CMVSS) tions, please consult your Volvo retailer. standards (Canada) Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable safety standards, as evidenced by the certification label on the driver's side B-pillar (the structural member at the side of the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door opening). For further information regarding these regulations, please consult your Volvo retailer.

Tire inflation pressures This label indicates the correct inflation pressures for the tires that were on the vehicle when it left the factory. Canadian models have the upper decal. U.S. models have the lower decal.

1 The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) should always be quoted in correspondence concerning your vehicle with the retailer and when ordering parts.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 271 11 Specifications

Dimensions and weights

Dimensions

Position Dimension In (mm) A Wheelbase 103.9 (2640)

B Length 181.7 (4615)

C Load length, floor 33.5 (850)

D Trunk lid up approx. 7.9 (200)

E1 Height 55.1 (1400)

E2 Height approx. 78.7 (2000)

Information Provided by:Provided Information 272 11 Specifications

Dimensions and weights

Position Dimension In (mm) F Load height, roof up 20.4 (525) Load height, roof down 10.2 (265)

G Track, front 60.1 (1550) 11 H Track, rear 61.4 (1560)

I Load width, floor 37.8 (960)

J Width 72.3 (1836)A

K Width incl. door mirrors (folded out) 79.6 in. (2025)

L Width incl. door mirrors (folded in) 72.7 in. (1847)

A Models with optional keyless drive 72.9 in. (1851)

Weights Category USA Canada Gross vehicle weight 4560 lbs 2070 kg

Capacity weight 640 lbs 290 kg

Permissible axle weight, front 2440 lbs 1110 kg

Permissible axle weight, rear 2370 lbs 1075 kg

Curb weight 3810-3820 lbs 1720-1740 kg

Max. trailer weight (w/o brakes) 1653 lbs All models: 750 kg

Information Provided by:Provided Information 273 11 Specifications

Dimensions and weights

Category USA Canada Max. trailer weight (with brakes) 2000 lbs All models: 900 kg

Max. tongue weight 165 lbs All models: 75 kg

11 CAUTION The maximum permissible axle loads and/ or the gross vehicle weight must not be exceeded.

WARNING When adding accessories, equipment, luggage and other cargo to your vehicle, the total capacity weight must not be exceeded.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 274 11 Specifications

Fuel, oils, and fluids

Specifications and capacities Category Specification Capacity Fuel tank Octane rating: unleaded gasoline, minimum 15.9 US gallons (60 liters) octane requirement AKI 87, recommended rating AKI 91 or above. 11 Engine oil (with filter replacement) See page 277 for information on engine oil 6.1 US quarts (5.8 liters) specifications.

Automatic transmission oil JWS 3309 8.14 US quarts (7.7 liters)

Coolant Volvo original coolant/antifreeze (50/50 mix- 10.5 US quarts (10 liters) – models with automatic ture of water and anti-freeze) transmission

Brake fluid DOT 4+ boiling point >536 °F (280 °C), P/N 0.63 US quarts (0.6 liters) 9437433

Power steering fluid WSS M2C204-A or equivalent 1.3 US quarts (1.2 liters) – system and reservoir combined

Washer fluid reservoir Use washer fluid solvent in cold weather con- 4.2 US qts (4 liters) ditions.

Air conditioning system Refrigerant – R134a 1.2 lbs. (530 grams)

Information Provided by:Provided Information 275 11 Specifications

Fuel, oils, and fluids

NOTE The transmission oil does not normally need to be changed during the service life of the vehicle. However, it may be necessary to replace the oil if the vehicle is often driven in areas of sustained temperature extremes 11 (hot or cold), when towing a trailer over long distances, for prolonged driving in mountainous areas, or if the vehicle is often driven short distances in temperatures under 40 °F (5 °C).

Information Provided by:Provided Information 276 11 Specifications

Engine oil

Oil specifications American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine oil must meet the minimum ILSAC symbol specification GF-4, API SL, or ACEA A1/B1. Lower quality oils may not offer the same fuel economy, engine performance, or engine protection. 11 Volume: 6.1 US qts (5.8 liters). Volvo recommends Castrol. Depending on your driving habits, premium or synthetic oils may provide superior fuel econ- G023491 omy and engine protection. Consult your Volvo Viscosity chart

retailer or a trained and qualified Volvo service G022917 technician for recommendations on premium Extreme engine operation or synthetic oils. Synthetic oils meeting SAE 0W-30 or 0W-40 The API Service Symbol "donut" is divided into and complying with oil quality requirements are Oil additives must not be used. three parts: recommended for driving in areas of sustained temperature extremes (hot or cold), when tow- • The upper section describes the oil's per- NOTE ing a trailer over long distances, and for pro- formance level. Synthetic oil is not used when the oil is longed driving in mountainous areas. • The center identifies the oil's viscosity. changed at the normal service intervals. • The lower section indicates whether the oil This oil is only used at customer request, at has demonstrated energy-conserving additional charge. Please consult a trained properties in a standard test in comparison and qualified Volvo service technician. to a reference oil.

Oil viscosity Incorrect viscosity oil can shorten engine life under normal use. SAE 5W-30 will provide good fuel economy and engine protection. See the viscosity chart.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 277 11 Specifications

Engine specifications

Engine designation B5254T7

OutputA kW/rps 169/83 hp/rpm 227/5000 11 TorqueA Nm/rps 320/25-80 ft. lbs./rpm 236/1500-4800

No. of cylinders 5

Displacement (liters/cubic inches) 2.52/153.8

Bore (mm/in.) 83/3.27

Stroke (mm/in.) 93.2/3.67

Compression ratio 9.0:1

Spark plugs type Volvo kit no. 30650379 gap inches/mm 0.027 in./0.7mm tightening torque ft. lbs./Nm 22.5 ft. lbs./30 Nm

A The engine specifications for output and torque listed in this table are based on the use of premium fuel.

Charge air cooler (Intercooler) air. The resulting increase in air flow raises (which resembles a radiator) is located The engine employs a turbo-compressor to pressure in the intake manifold and increases between the turbo-compressor and intake force air into the engine intake manifold and a engine power over that developed by the nor- manifold. charge air cooler to cool the compressed inlet mally-aspirated engine. The charge air cooler

Information Provided by:Provided Information 278 11 Specifications

Engine specifications

Fuel system The engine is equipped with a multiport fuel injection system.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 279 11 Specifications

Electrical system

General information 12-volt system with voltage controlled generator. Single wire system in which the chassis and engine block are used as conductors, grounded on the chassis.

11 Battery Voltage 12 V

Cold start capacity (CCA) 700 AA

Reserve capacity (RC) 135 min

Capacity (Ah) 80

A Models equipped with the Premium Sound audio system, the Volvo Navigation System and/or keyless drive.

If the battery must be replaced, replace it with one with the same cold start capacity and reserve capacity as the original (see the decal on the battery).

WARNING PROPOSITION 65 WARNING! Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 280 11 Specifications

Three-way catalytic converter

Three-way catalytic converter – components or location, or removing com- general information ponents, and/the repeated use of leaded • Keep your engine properly tuned. Certain fuel. engine malfunctions, particularly involving the electrical, fuel or distributor ignition NOTE systems, may cause unusually high three- Unleaded fuel is required for vehicles with way catalytic converter temperatures. Do three-way catalytic converters. 11 not continue to operate your vehicle if you detect engine misfire, noticeable loss of power or other unusual operating conditions, such as engine overheating or backfiring. A properly tuned engine will help avoid malfunctions that could damage the three-way catalytic converter. • Do not park your vehicle over combustible materials, such as grass or leaves, which can come into contact with the hot exhaust system and cause such materials to ignite under certain wind and weather conditions. • Excessive starter cranking (in excess of one minute), or an intermittently firing or flooded engine can cause three-way catalytic converter or exhaust system overheating. • Remember that tampering or unauthorized modifications to the engine, the Electronic Control Module, or the vehicle may be ille- gal and can cause three-way catalytic converter or exhaust system overheating. This includes: altering fuel injection settings or components, altering emission system

Information Provided by:Provided Information 281 11 Specifications

Overview of information and warning symbols

Introduction Symbols in the main instrument panel Symbol Description Page The symbols in the vehicle's various displays Indicator and warning symbols are divided into three main categories: Fuel level warning 58 Symbol Description Page light • Warning symbols • Indicator symbols Warning 56 11 • Information symbols Trailer turn signal 59 The following tables list the most common indicator symbols, their Description and the pages in this manual that provide more detailed information. Information 56

Warning symbol Parking brake 59 The red warning symbol lights up to indi- applied cate a problem related to safety and/or drivability. A message will also appear in the main Malfunction indi- 58 instruments panel's display. cator light SRS airbag sys- 59 Information symbol Fault in the ABS 58 tem The yellow information symbol lights up system and a text message is displayed to provide the driver with necessary information about one of Oil pressure warn- 59 the vehicle's systems. Rear fog light 58 ing light

Seat belt reminder 59 Stability system 159 DSTC*

Information Provided by:Provided Information

282 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 11 Specifications

Overview of information and warning symbols

Symbol Description Page Other information symbols Information symbols in the ceiling Symbol Description Page console Generator warn- 59 Symbol Description Page ing light Rain sensor* 75 Seat belt reminder 59

11 Brake failure 60 Cruise control* 72 warning light Occupant weight 29 sensor

High beam indica- 54 Information symbols in the center tor console display Symbol Description Page Surround sound 248 Left turn signal 54 (Premium Sound only)

G021216

HD radio 253

Right turn signal 54 Audio files 259

CD folder 259

Bluetooth-con- 263 nected cell phone

BluetoothTM 263 hands-free

Information Provided by:Provided Information

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 283 11 Specifications

Volvo programs

Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance Your new Volvo comes with a four year ON CALL roadside assistance. Additional information, features, and benefits are described in a separate information package in your glove compartment. 11 If you require assistance, dial: In the U.S. 1-800-638-6586 (1-800-63- VOLVO) In Canada 1-800-263-0475

Technician certification In addition to Volvo factory training, Volvo supports certification by the National Institute for Automotive Service Excellence (A.S.E.). Certi- fied technicians have demonstrated a high degree of competence in specific areas. Besides passing exams, each technician must also have worked in the field for two or more years before a certificate is issued. These pro- fessional technicians are best able to analyze vehicle problems and perform the necessary maintenance procedures to keep your Volvo at peak operating condition.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 284 11 Specifications

Information Provided by:Provided Information 285 12 Index

1, 2, 3 ... Audio system AUX port...... 246 audio functions...... 245 Axle weight...... 185, 273 12-volt sockets...... 63, 118 automatic sound control...... 249 AUX port...... 246 Bluetooth streaming audio...... 247 B A compact disc care...... 260 Dolby Surround Pro Logic II...... 248 Bass...... 248 A/C (air conditioning)...... 88 equalizer...... 249 Battery HD digital radio...... 253 ABS (anti-lock brake system)...... 155 maintenance...... 224 menu settings...... 262 12 Accessory installation warning...... 15 remote key, replacing...... 124 radio functions...... 251 specifications...... 280 Adaptive brake lights...... 154 selecting a sound source...... 245 warning symbols...... 224 Airbags Sirius satellite radio...... 255 front...... 25 sound settings...... 248 Battery – replacing...... 225 inflatable curtain...... 34 steering wheel keypad...... 245 Black box...... 13 storing radio stations...... 251 side impact...... 32 Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)..... 168 subwoofer...... 248 Airbag system...... 25 Bluetooth cell phone connection...... 263 USB/iPod connector...... 246 Air conditioning...... 88 Auto-dim rearview mirror...... 78 Booster cushion Air distribution table...... 95 accessory...... 47 Autolock...... 81 Air vents...... 90 Brake fluid...... 222, 275 Automatic locking retractor...... 40 Alarm system...... 135 Brake lights...... 66, 154 Automatic sound control...... 249 turning off sensors...... 136 Brake system Automatic transmission...... 151 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)...... 155 anti-lock brakes (ABS)...... 155 kickdown...... 152 Brake pad inspection...... 154 Approach lighting...... 82 oil...... 275 emergency brake assistance...... 156 Audio files...... 259 shiftlock override...... 153 fluid...... 222 Automatic transmission - Geartronic...... 152 general information...... 154

Information Provided by:Provided Information 286 12 Index

Bulbs Climate system D headlights...... 226 air distribution...... 95 list of...... 232 air vents...... 90 Daytime running lights...... 64, 65 Bulbs, replacing...... 226 Electronic Climate Control...... 91 Detachable key blade...... 124 Interior Air Quality System...... 92 Detachable trailer hitch...... 166 passenger compartment filter...... 88 C recirculation...... 92 Dimensions...... 272 refrigerant...... 88, 275 Disconnecting the front passenger’s air- Capacities, fluids...... 275 Climate system, general information...... 88 bag...... 29 Capacity weight...... 185, 273 Clock Display...... 61 12 Catalytic converter, three-way...... 281 setting...... 81 Dolby Pro Logic II (DPL II)...... 248 CD player...... 259 Cold weather precautions...... 141 Door mirrors...... 79 Cell phone, hands-free connection...... 263 Compact disc care...... 260 Door Mounted Inflatable Curtain system (DMIC)...... 34 Central locking system - remote key...... 122 Compass in rearview mirror...... 78 Driver distraction warning...... 15 Chains...... 188 Conserving electrical current...... 142 Driving economically...... 140 Changing a wheel...... 199 Convertible top (Power retractable hard top)...... 106 Driving through water...... 140 Child restraints recalls and registration...... 40 Coolant...... 275 DSTC, stability system...... 158 changing...... 221 Child restraint systems...... 41 checking level of...... 221 booster cushions...... 47 ISOFIX/LATCH anchors...... 48 Courtesy lighting...... 111 E Crash mode...... 38 Child safety...... 39 Economical driving...... 140 booster cushions...... 47 Cruise control...... 72 Electrical current – conserving...... 142 child restraint systems...... 41 Cup holders...... 113, 116 Electrical system...... 280 Curb weight...... 185, 273

Information Provided by:Provided Information 287 12 Index

Electronic Brake Force Distribution F Fuel requirements...... 143 (EBD)...... 155 Fuel tank volume...... 275 Federal Clean Air Act...... 214 Electronic Climate Control...... 89 Fuses, replacing...... 234 air distribution table...... 95 Flat tires Electronic Climate Control (ECC)...... 91 changing...... 196, 199 repairing with tire sealing system...... 189 Emergency brake...... 157 G Floor mats Emergency locking retractor...... 40 cleaning...... 209 Garage door opener Emergency starting...... 163 placing correctly...... 147, 149 HomeLink® Wireless Control System... 83 12 Emergency towing...... 160 Fluids and oils...... 275 Gasoline requirements...... 143 Emission inspection readiness...... 215 FM1/FM2 menu...... 251 Geartronic...... 152 Engine Fog lights Glossary of tire terminology...... 184 specifications...... 278 front...... 66 Glove compartment...... 114 starting...... 147 rear...... 66 locking...... 134 starting with keyless drive...... 149 Front airbags...... 25 Gross vehicle weight (GVW)...... 185, 273 Engine compartment overview...... 218 disconnecting passenger’s side airbag 29 Engine oil...... 219 Front fog lights...... 66 changing...... 219 Front seats...... 98 checking...... 219 H accessing the rear seat...... 98 specifications...... 277 adjusting the head restraints...... 104 Hand brake (parking brake)...... 157 volumes...... 275 manually operated...... 98 Hazard warning flashers...... 76 Environment...... 14 power...... 102 HD digital radio...... 253 Equalizer, audio system...... 249 Fuel filler door Headlights...... 64 Eyelets for anchoring loads...... 118 opening manually...... 67 Active Bending Lights...... 64 unlocking...... 66 changing bulbs...... 226 Fuel gauge...... 54

Information Provided by:Provided Information 288 12 Index

high and low beams...... 68 Information display...... 54, 61 Keyless drive high beam flash...... 68 messages in...... 61 location of antennas (pacemaker warn- Headlight washers...... 74 Information symbol...... 56 ing)...... 130 locking and unlocking the vehicle...... 128 High beam flash...... 68 Inspection, preparing for...... 215 power seat memory...... 129 High beams...... 68 Inspection readiness...... 215 starting the engine...... 149 Hoisting the vehicle...... 215 Instrument overview...... 52 Keylock...... 13, 147 HomeLink® Wireless Control System...... 83 Instrument panel...... 52, 54 Kickdown...... 152 Home safe lighting...... 68, 82 Instrument panel lighting...... 66 12 Hood, opening...... 217 Interior Air Quality System...... 92 Interior lighting...... 111 L I iPod connector (audio system)...... 246 Label information...... 270 ISOFIX/LATCH anchors...... 48 LATCH (ISOFIX) anchors...... 48 Ignition switch...... 146 Lighting panel...... 64, 65 Immobilizer...... 147 J Load anchoring eyelets...... 118 Immobilizer (start inhibitor)...... 122 Locking Important information...... 10 Jack from the inside...... 132 Indicator and warning symbols...... 54, 56 location of...... 196 glove compartment...... 134 Inflatable Curtain...... 34 Jump starting...... 163 Locking the vehicle...... 128 Inflation pressure...... 179 Long distance trips...... 142 Inflation pressure, checking...... 179 K Long loads, ski hatch...... 119 Inflation pressure table...... 181 Lug nuts (wheel nuts)...... 198 Information and warning symbols, table Key (ignition switch) positions...... 146 of...... 282 Key blade...... 124, 129

Information Provided by:Provided Information 289 12 Index

M P R

Maintenance...... 214 Panel lighting, instrument...... 66 Radio hoisting the vehicle...... 215 Park assist...... 172 Sirius satellite radio...... 255 performed by the owner...... 215 Parking brake...... 157 Radio functions...... 251 Mirrors...... 78 HD digital radio...... 253 Parking lights...... 66 Model plate...... 271 Rain sensor - windshield wipers...... 75 Passenger’s side front airbag, disabling. . . 29 Motor oil...... 219, 277 Rear fog light...... 66 Periodic owner-performed maintenance. 215 checking...... 219 Rear park assist...... 172 12 Permissible axle weight...... 185 Rearview mirror...... 78 Personal settings...... 81 auto-dim function...... 78 O Power door mirrors...... 79 Rearview mirror with compass...... 78 Power front seat...... 102 Occupant safety...... 18 Recalls, child restraints...... 40 memory function...... 103 Occupant weight sensor...... 29 Recirculation (climate system)...... 92 Power retractable hard top Octane recommendations...... 143 introduction...... 106 Refrigerant (A/C system)...... 88, 275 Oil...... 219 messages...... 108 Refueling...... 145 changing...... 219 operating...... 108 fuel tank volume...... 275 checking...... 219 trunk divider...... 107 Registering child restraints...... 40 wind blocker...... 110 On Call Roadside Assistance...... 284 Remote key...... 122 Opening the hood...... 217 Power steering fluid...... 222 battery replacement...... 124 Opening the trunk from the inside...... 133 Power windows...... 77 functions...... 123 key blade...... 124 Owner maintenance...... 215 Pregnancy, using seat belts during...... 22 Private locking...... 126 Replacing fuses...... 234

Information Provided by:Provided Information 290 12 Index

Reporting safety defects Side door mirrors...... 79 T Canada...... 19 Side impact airbags...... 32 USA...... 18 Tachometer...... 54 Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags...... 32 Roll-over protection system (ROPS)...... 37 Temporary spare tire...... 195, 196 Sirius satellite radio...... 255 Three-way catalytic converter...... 281 Ski hatch...... 119 Tire inflation...... 179 S Snow chains...... 188 Tire inflation pressure...... 181 Snow tires...... 188 Safety, occupant...... 18 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) 201 Sound control, automatic...... 249 Safety defects, reporting Tires...... 176 12 Sound settings, audio system...... 248 Canada...... 19 age...... 176 USA...... 18 Spare tire...... 195, 196 changing...... 196, 199 Seat belt Stability system...... 158 changing from summer to winter...... 177 reminder...... 22 Dynamic Stability Traction Control designations...... 182 (DSTC)...... 158 glossary of terms...... 184 Seat belts...... 20 improving economy...... 176 Automatic locking retractor/Emergency Starting the engine...... 147 inflation...... 179 locking retractor...... 40 with keyless drive...... 149 inflation pressure, checking...... 179 buckling...... 20 Start inhibitor (immobilizer)...... 122, 147 inflation pressure table...... 181 guides...... 21 Steering wheel load ratings...... 180 maintenance...... 23 adjusting...... 76 rotation...... 177 pretensioners...... 20 keypad...... 245 snow...... 188 unbuckling...... 21 Storage compartments...... 113 spare...... 195 use during pregnancy...... 22 Studded tires...... 188 spare tire (location)...... 196 Seats, front...... 98 speed ratings...... 180 Subwoofer...... 248 Shiftlock...... 13 storing...... 177 override...... 153 Supplemental restraint system...... 24 studded...... 188 Symbols, overview...... 282 tire pressure monitoring system...... 201

Information Provided by:Provided Information 291 12 Index

tire sealing system...... 189 U Warranties...... 214 tread wear indicator...... 178 Washer fluid...... 221, 275 uniform tire quality grading...... 187 Uniform Tire Quality Grading...... 187 Washer fluid reservoir...... 218, 221 winter driving...... 188 Water, driving through...... 140 Tire sealing system...... 189 Weights...... 273 Towing a trailer...... 164 V trailer hitch...... 166 Wheel nuts...... 198 Valet locking...... 126 Towing the vehicle...... 160 Wheels...... 176 Vehicle dimensions...... 272 changing...... 199 Trailer hitch - detachable...... 166 12 Vehicle Event Data...... 13 storing...... 177 Trailer towing...... 164 Vehicle loading...... 185 Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS)...... 35 Transmission Vehicle maintenance...... 214 Wind blocker (power retractable hard top) Geartronic...... 152 performed by the owner...... 215 (Power retractable hard top)...... 110 shiftlock override...... 153 Vehicle towing...... 160 Windows Tread wear indicator...... 178 Vehicle weights...... 273 power...... 77 Treble...... 248 VIN (Vehicle Identification Number)...... 271 Windshield washer fluid reservoir...... 218 Trip computer...... 70 Volvo and the environment...... 14 Windshield wiper blades...... 223 Trips, long distance...... 142 Volvo maintenance...... 214 Windshield wipers...... 74 Trunk rain sensor...... 75 loading...... 117 Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance...... 284 Winter tires...... 188 opening from the inside...... 133 opening mechanically...... 133 Wiper blades replacing windshield wipers...... 223 Trunk divider (Power retractable hard W top)...... 107 Warning flashers, hazard...... 76 Turn signals...... 68 indicator lights...... 54 Warning symbol...... 56

Information Provided by:Provided Information 292 Information Provided by:Provided Information * !©"#$ Information Provided by:Provided Information